JP6776290B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine capable of playing a game.

The conventional game machine includes a movable body (first movable member) that can be operated, and a display means (image display device) that can display an image corresponding to the operation body (effect button) corresponding to the operation body (effect button). There is one that operates the operating body based on the operation of the operating body when the image corresponding to the operating body is displayed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2015-188548

However, in Patent Document 1, there is a problem that the game entertainment cannot be improved because the display mode of the image corresponding to the operating body does not change even if the operating body is operated.

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the game entertainment.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the gaming machine of the means A of the present invention is
It is a game machine that can play games
An operating body that can be operated by the player,
Movable movable body and
An operation effect executing means capable of executing an operation effect for operating the movable body based on the operation of the operation body,
A display means capable of displaying an image corresponding to the operating body corresponding to the operating body as an image for encouraging the operation of the operating body when executing the operation effect.
With
The display mode of the image corresponding to the operating body can be changed according to the movement of the movable body.
further,
Item display means for displaying multiple items corresponding to multiple types of effects that can be selected by the player,
A selection effect means capable of executing a selection effect for selecting any of the plurality of items,
A corresponding effect executing means capable of executing an effect corresponding to an item selected by the selected effect means from the plurality of types of effects is provided.
The item display means can display items corresponding to the first effect even when the first effect of the plurality of types of effects is being executed in the selected effect.
The selection effect includes a first selection effect executed regardless of the movement of the player and a second selection effect executed based on the movement of the player.
The corresponding effect execution means
When an item corresponding to a second effect different from the first effect is selected while the first effect is being executed, the second effect is executed.
When the item corresponding to the first effect is selected again in the state where the first effect is being executed, the state of the first effect being executed is inherited and executed.
As the plurality of types of effects, music can be played.
When the item selected in the first selection effect is changed, the music to be played is changed according to the change of the selected item.
Even if the item selected in the second selection effect is changed, the music to be played is not changed.
It is characterized by that.
Further, the gaming machine of means B of the present invention is
It is a game machine that can play games
An operating body that can be operated by the player,
A predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect by a predetermined image based on the operation of the operating body, and
A display means capable of displaying an image corresponding to the operating body corresponding to the operating body as an image for prompting the operation of the operating body when executing the predetermined effect.
With
The display mode of the image corresponding to the operating body can be changed according to the predetermined effect.
further,
Item display means for displaying multiple items corresponding to multiple types of effects that can be selected by the player,
A selection effect means capable of executing a selection effect for selecting any of the plurality of items,
A corresponding effect executing means capable of executing an effect corresponding to an item selected by the selected effect means from the plurality of types of effects is provided.
The item display means can display items corresponding to the first effect even when the first effect of the plurality of types of effects is being executed in the selected effect.
The selection effect includes a first selection effect executed regardless of the movement of the player and a second selection effect executed based on the movement of the player.
The corresponding effect execution means
When an item corresponding to a second effect different from the first effect is selected while the first effect is being executed, the second effect is executed.
When the item corresponding to the first effect is selected again in the state where the first effect is being executed, the state of the first effect being executed is inherited and executed.
Music can be played as the plurality of types of effects,
When the item selected in the first selection effect is changed, the music to be played is changed according to the change of the selected item.
Even if the item selected in the second selection effect is changed, the music to be played is not changed.
It is characterized by that.
Further, the gaming machine of the means C of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the means A or B.
A notification effect execution means capable of executing a notification effect for notifying that a specific condition advantageous to the player has been satisfied is provided.
The notification effect execution means can execute the notification effect when the first selection effect is being executed.
It is characterized by that.
In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the gaming machine of the means 1 of the present invention is
A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
An operating body that can be operated by the player (for example, push button 31B),
Movable movable body (for example, movable accessory 400) and
An operation effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a post-operation effect shown in FIG. 15) capable of executing an operation effect (for example, a post-operation effect) for operating the movable body based on the operation of the operation body. The part that executes the process) and
When executing the operation effect, an image corresponding to the operating body (for example, an image of the push button 31B) corresponding to the operating body can be displayed as an image for promoting the operation of the operating body (for example, an operation promoting image). Display means (for example, effect display device 5) and
With
The display mode of the image corresponding to the operating body can be changed according to the movement of the movable body (for example, as shown in FIG. 19, the movable accessory 400 moves (falls) from the retracted position to the effect position. Correspondingly, the image of the push button 31B in the protruding state is updated to the image of the push button 31B in the non-protruding state),
further,
Item display means for displaying a plurality of items corresponding to a plurality of types of effects that can be selected by the player (for example, as shown in FIG. 47, an effect control microcomputer 90200 or the like that displays items corresponding to a plurality of types of music). )When,
A selection effect means (as shown in FIG. 47, an effect control microcomputer 90200 or the like that changes an item selected by a selection operation) capable of executing a selection effect for selecting any one of the plurality of items.
Corresponding effect executing means (as shown in FIG. 47) capable of executing an effect corresponding to the item selected in the selected effect means (as shown in FIG. 47, an effect control microcomputer that outputs music and video corresponding to the selected item. 90200 etc.)
The item display means can display items corresponding to the first effect even when the first effect of the plurality of types of effects is being executed in the selected effect (for example, FIG. 47 (see FIG. 47). As shown in e), even if the item corresponding to the music A is being executed, the item corresponding to the music A can be displayed by "Back", etc.),
The corresponding effect execution means
When an item corresponding to a second effect different from the first effect is selected while the first effect is being executed, the second effect is executed (for example, in FIG. 47 (h)). As shown, if an item corresponding to music B different from music A is selected, music B is played from the beginning, etc.),
When the item corresponding to the first effect is selected again in the state where the first effect is being executed, the state of the first effect being executed is taken over and executed (for example, FIG. 47 (Fig. 47). As shown in g), when the item corresponding to the music A is selected again, the music A is played as it is, etc.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by corresponding to the movement of the movable body and the change in the display mode of the image corresponding to the operating body. In addition, even when the selected effect is selected again, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

The gaming machine according to means 2 of the present invention
A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1)
An operating body that can be operated by the player (for example, push button 31B),
With a predetermined effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the action effect) capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, the action effect shown in FIG. 20) by a predetermined image based on the operation of the operating body. ,
A display means (for example, an effect) capable of displaying an image corresponding to the operation body (for example, an image of the push button 31B) corresponding to the operation body as an image for prompting the operation of the operation body when the predetermined effect is executed. Display device 5) and
With
The display mode of the image corresponding to the operating body can be changed in response to the predetermined effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 20, the image of the push button 31B in the protruding state corresponding to the action effect is in the non-protruding state. The part updated to the image of push button 31B),
further,
Item display means for displaying a plurality of items corresponding to a plurality of types of effects that can be selected by the player (for example, as shown in FIG. 47, an effect control microcomputer 90200 or the like that displays items corresponding to a plurality of types of music). )When,
A selection effect means capable of executing a selection effect for selecting one of the plurality of items (as shown in FIG. 47, an effect control microcomputer 90200 or the like for changing an item selected by a selection operation).
Corresponding effect executing means (as shown in FIG. 47) capable of executing an effect corresponding to the item selected in the selected effect means (as shown in FIG. 47, an effect control microcomputer that outputs music and video corresponding to the selected item. 90200 etc.)
The item display means can display items corresponding to the first effect even when the first effect of the plurality of types of effects is being executed in the selected effect (for example, FIG. 47 (see FIG. 47). As shown in e), even if the item corresponding to the music A is being executed, the item corresponding to the music A can be displayed by "Back", etc.),
The corresponding effect execution means
When an item corresponding to a second effect different from the first effect is selected while the first effect is being executed, the second effect is executed (for example, in FIG. 47 (h)). As shown, if an item corresponding to music B different from music A is selected, music B is played from the beginning, etc.),
When the item corresponding to the first effect is selected again in the state where the first effect is being executed, the state of the first effect being executed is taken over and executed (for example, FIG. 47 (Fig. 47). As shown in g), if the item corresponding to music A is selected again, music A will be played as it is)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by corresponding to the predetermined effect and the change in the display mode of the motion-corresponding image. In addition, even when the selected effect is selected again, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to means 2.
The predetermined effect is characterized in that the predetermined image acts on the image corresponding to the operating body (for example, the action effect shown in FIG. 20).
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by drawing the player's attention to the action production.

The gaming machine of the means 4 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1.
The image corresponding to the operation body is an image corresponding to the first operation body (for example, an image of the push button 31B in a non-protruding state) and an image corresponding to the second operation body (for example, an image corresponding to the second operation body) whose display mode is different from the image corresponding to the first operation body. Image of push button 31B in protruding state), including
The image corresponding to the second operation body can be changed to the image corresponding to the first operation body corresponding to the operation effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 19, from the retracted position of the movable accessory 400 to the effect position. The part where the image of the push button 31B in the protruding state is updated to the image of the push button 31B in the non-protruding state in response to the movement (fall))
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it becomes easy for the player to recognize that the display mode of the image corresponding to the operating body has changed in response to the movement of the movable body, so that the game enjoyment can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means 5 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1 or the means 4.
The display means ends the display of the image corresponding to the operating body in response to the operation effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 16B, the movable accessory 400 moves (falls) from the retracted position to the effect position. ) To erase the image of the push button 31B from the effect display device 5)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the effect of motion effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means 6 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the means 5.
The display means ends the display of the image corresponding to the operating body after the operation effect is started (for example, as shown in FIG. 16B, the movable accessory 400 is moved from the retracted position to the effect position (for example,). (Fall) The part where the image of the push button 31B is erased from the effect display device 5 after the start)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it becomes easy for the player to recognize that the display of the image corresponding to the operating body has been completed in response to the movement of the movable body, so that the gaming interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means 7 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1, the means 4 to the means 6.
The operation body compatible image is a first operation body compatible image (for example, an image of a push button 31B in a non-protruding state) and a second operation body compatible image (for example, an image corresponding to a second operation body whose display mode is different from that of the first operation body compatible image). Image of push button 31B in protruding state), including
When the operating body is operated while the image corresponding to the first operating body is displayed, the display of the image corresponding to the first operating body is terminated based on the elapse of the first period from the operation (for example,). As shown in FIG. 16A, when the push button 31B is operated while displaying the image of the push button 31B in the non-protruding state as the operation promotion image, the push button is pressed at the timing when the period L2 has elapsed from the operation. The part that erases the image of 31B),
When the operating body is operated while the image corresponding to the second operating body is displayed, the image corresponding to the second operating body is based on the fact that a second period different from the first period has elapsed from the operation. Ending the display (for example, as shown in FIG. 16B, when the push button 31B is operated while displaying the image of the push button 31B in the protruding state as the operation promotion image, the period L3 is set from the operation. The part that erases the image of push button 31B at the elapsed timing)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the game entertainment can be improved by making the period from the operation of the operating body to the end of the display of the operating body compatible image according to the displayed operating body compatible image.

The gaming machine of the means 8 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 and the means 4 to 7.
The operation body compatible image is a first operation body compatible image (for example, an image of a push button 31B in a non-protruding state) and a second operation body compatible image (for example, an image corresponding to a second operation body whose display mode is different from that of the first operation body compatible image). Image of push button 31B in protruding state), including
When the operation effect is not executed based on the operation of the operation body (for example, when the variation display result is out of alignment as shown in FIG. 17), the operation body is operated and then the third operation body is operated. Based on the elapse of the period, the display of the image corresponding to the first operating body is finished (for example, as shown in FIG. 17A), the push button is pressed at the timing when the period L2 has elapsed since the push button 31B was operated. The portion for erasing the image of 31B), the display of the image corresponding to the second operating body is terminated based on the elapse of the third period after the operating body is operated (for example, shown in FIG. 17B). The part that erases the image of the push button 31B at the timing when the period L2 elapses after the push button 31B is operated)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the display period when the motion effect is not executed can be made common, it is possible to prevent a deterioration in the game interest.

The gaming machine of the means 9 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1, the means 4 to the means 8.
The image corresponding to the operation body is an image corresponding to the first operation body (for example, an image of the push button 31B in a non-protruding state) and an image corresponding to the second operation body (for example, an image corresponding to the second operation body) whose display mode is different from the image corresponding to the first operation body. Image of push button 31B in protruding state), including
When the operation effect is executed based on the operation of the operation body (for example, when the variation display result is a big hit), the display of the image corresponding to the second operation body is terminated in the first aspect. (For example, as shown in FIG. 16B, the image of the push button 31B in the protruding state is updated to the image of the push button 31B in the non-protruding state for a period L3 after the push button 31B is operated. The part that erases the updated non-protruding push button 31B image from the effect display device 5),
When the operation effect is not executed based on the operation of the operation body (for example, when the variation display result is out of alignment), the second operation body is in a second mode different from the first mode. Ending the display of the corresponding image (for example, as shown in FIG. 17B, the image of the protruding push button 31B is deleted from the effect display device 5 at the timing when the period L2 elapses after the push button 31B is operated. Part to do)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the mode of ending the display of the image corresponding to the second operating body differs depending on whether the motion effect is executed or not based on the operation of the operating body, thereby improving the game entertainment. it can.

The gaming machine of the means 10 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 6.
The image corresponding to the operation body is the image corresponding to the first operation body (for example, the image of the push button 31B in the non-protruding state in the modified example 2) and the second operation body whose display start timing is different from the image corresponding to the first operation body. The corresponding image (for example, the image of the push button 31B in the protruding state in the modification 2) and the corresponding image are included.
When the image corresponding to the first operating body is displayed, the display of the image corresponding to the first operating body is terminated in the first aspect based on the operation of the operating body.
When the image corresponding to the second operation body is displayed, the display of the image corresponding to the second operation body is terminated in a second aspect different from the first aspect based on the operation of the operation body. (For example, as shown in the second modification, the image of the push button 31B in the protruding state is deleted based on the operation of the push button 31B when the image of the push button 31B in the protruding state is displayed. And the mode of erasing the image of the non-protruding push button 31B based on the operation of the push button 31B while the image of the non-protruding push button 31B is displayed).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the game entertainment can be improved by changing the display ending mode of the operating body-compatible image according to the display start timing of the operating body-compatible image.

The gaming machine of the means 11 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to the means 10.
A detection means (for example, push button 31B) capable of detecting the movement of the player, and
Specific display execution means (for example, effect display device 5) that performs specific display corresponding to the detection means, and
With
The specific display executing means is an image corresponding to the first operation body (for example, an image of the push button 31B in a non-protruding state) and an image corresponding to the operation body whose display mode is different from the image corresponding to the first operation body. Includes a second operator-compatible image (for example, an image of the non-protruding push button 31B), which is more advantageous to the player than the first operator-compatible image.
After displaying the image corresponding to the first operation body, the image corresponding to the second operation body can be displayed by executing the action effect acting on the image corresponding to the first operation (for example, FIG. 20 as a modification 1). As shown in the above, a portion that changes the image of the non-protruding push button 31B into the image of the protruding push button 31B according to the action effect)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it becomes easy to understand that the image corresponding to the first operating body is changed to the image corresponding to the second operating body by executing the action effect, so that the effect of the effect can be improved.

In addition, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions according to the following means 12 to 19. Conventionally, in a game machine, one of a plurality of types of demo effects as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-32534 is displayed so that the player can select it, and the selection operation is detected during the demo effects. Then, when the demo image was scrolled and displayed, there was a song that switched to the music corresponding to the displayed demo effect. However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, when the selection operation is performed in the state where the demo production is already selected and the state before the selection is returned, the music corresponding to the demo production is repeated by cueing. , There was a risk that the interest would decline. In view of this point, it is required to provide a game machine capable of preventing a decline in the interest in the game.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine of the means 12 according to another aspect is
A gaming machine that plays a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 901, etc.)
Item display means for displaying a plurality of items corresponding to a plurality of types of effects that can be selected by the player (for example, as shown in FIG. 47, an effect control microcomputer 90200 or the like that displays items corresponding to a plurality of types of music). )When,
A selection effect means capable of executing a selection effect for selecting one of the plurality of items (as shown in FIG. 47, an effect control microcomputer 90200 or the like for changing an item selected by a selection operation).
Corresponding effect executing means (as shown in FIG. 47) capable of executing an effect corresponding to the item selected in the selected effect means (as shown in FIG. 47, an effect control microcomputer that outputs music and video corresponding to the selected item. 90200 etc.)
The item display means can display items corresponding to the first effect even when the first effect of the plurality of types of effects is being executed in the selected effect (for example, FIG. 47 (see FIG. 47). As shown in e), even if the item corresponding to the music A is being executed, the item corresponding to the music A can be displayed by "Back", etc.),
The corresponding effect execution means
When an item corresponding to a second effect different from the first effect is selected while the first effect is being executed, the second effect is executed (for example, in FIG. 47 (h)). As shown, if an item corresponding to music B different from music A is selected, music B is played from the beginning, etc.),
When the item corresponding to the first effect is selected again in the state where the first effect is being executed, the state of the first effect being executed is taken over and executed (for example, FIG. 47 (Fig. 47). As shown in g), when the item corresponding to the music A is selected again, the music A is played as it is).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game even when the selected effect is selected again.

The gaming machine of the means 13 is the gaming machine according to the means 12.
Further provided with a state control means (for example, a game control microcomputer 90560) capable of controlling an advantageous state (for example, a big hit state) that is advantageous to the player.
The selection effect means can at least execute the selection effect during the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 47, the selection effect for selecting an item can be executed during the jackpot state, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game in the advantageous state even when the selected effect is selected again.

The gaming machine of the means 14 is the gaming machine of the means 13.
The selection effect is a first selection effect executed regardless of the player's operation at the start of the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 47 (a), a round executed regardless of the player's operation at the start of the jackpot. (Selection effect at the start, etc.) and the second selection effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 47 (d)) executed based on the player's operation after the first selection effect. Includes selection effects, etc. that are executed based on operations).

According to such a configuration, since there are a plurality of execution timings of the selection effect in the advantageous state, the selection effect can be executed according to the preference of the player.

The gaming machine of the means 15 is the gaming machine according to the means 14.
The period during which the second selection effect can be executed is longer than that of the first selection effect (as shown in FIG. 47, the first selection effect at the start of the round is from the start of the first round to the end of the second round. The second selection effect at the start of the 3rd round is set from the start of the 3rd round to the final round, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to deal with various types of players by lengthening the executable period of the second selection effect to be executed based on the player's operation.

The gaming machine of the means 16 is the gaming machine according to the means 14 or the means 15.
The corresponding effect execution means
As the plurality of types of effects, the music can be played (as shown in FIG. 47, the music can be played, etc.).
In the first selection effect, when an item is changed based on the operation of the player, the music to be played is changed according to the change of the item (for example, as shown in FIGS. 47 (a) and 47 (b)). In addition, in the selection effect at the start of the round, when the item is changed based on the operation of the player, the music to be played changes according to the change of the item, etc.),
In the second selection effect, even if the item is changed based on the operation of the player, the music to be played is not changed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 47 (e) and 47 (f), 3). In the selection effect at the start of the round, even if the item is changed based on the operation of the player, the played music does not change, etc.).

According to such a configuration, since the music is not frequently switched, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of the means 17 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 14 to the means 16.
In the second selection effect, the item display means displays the display of the item corresponding to the effect currently being executed in a manner different from the display of the item when the first selection effect is executed (for example,). As shown in FIG. 47 (e), in the selection effect at the start of the third round, the display of the item corresponding to the currently executed song is "back", which is different from the display of "A" in the selection effect at the start of the round. Display with, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to show the player in an easy-to-understand manner which effect is currently being executed.

The gaming machine of the means 18 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 14 to the means 17.
Hold storage means (for example, RAM 9055 of the game control microcomputer 90560) for storing information related to the variable display as hold information (for example, hold storage), and
A determination means (for example, a game control microcomputer 90560 or the like) that can determine whether or not the advantageous state is controlled after the execution of the variation display corresponding to the hold information before the execution of the variation display corresponding to the hold information. When,
In the advantageous state, when the hold information determined to be controlled in the advantageous state is stored in the hold storage means based on the determination result of the determination means, the control in the advantageous state is performed. Further equipped with a notification effect means (for example, a microcomputer 90200 for effect control) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a hold continuous effect) to be notified in advance.
The notification effect means
The notification effect can be executed at any of the plurality of timings in the advantageous state (for example, the hold continuous effect can be executed at any of the plurality of timings during the round).
As one of the plurality of timings, the notification effect can be executed at the timing when the player selects any one of the plurality of items in the first selection effect (for example, a plurality of timings). As one of the timings, the hold continuous production can be executed at the timing when any one of the plurality of items at the start of the round is selected).

According to such a configuration, the player can be surprised in the first-selection effect, and the interest of the game can be improved. In the second selection effect, the notification effect may be executed at the timing when the player selects any one of the plurality of items.

The gaming machine of the means 19 is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 16 to the means 18.
At the time of the selection effect, the corresponding effect execution means reproduces a specific part that is a part of the selected music and is different from the beginning of the music (for example, reproduces a chorus part).
The item display means includes a selectable image (for example, the selectable music image 9096 in FIG. 49) capable of identifying selectable music (for example, the first music to the third music in FIG. 49) and a non-selectable image. Possible music (for example, the fourth to sixth music of FIG. 49) can be displayed together with a non-selectable image (for example, the non-selectable music image 9097 of FIG. 49) (for example). , FIG. 49 (A), etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effect of producing the music when the music is selected.

In addition, the present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure example of a pachinko game machine. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect symbol variation start processing. It is a figure which shows the protrusion determination ratio of a push button. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during the production symbol change. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect execution processing after operation. (A) is a timing chart in the reach effect when the big hit is achieved without the push button protruding, and (B) is a timing chart in the reach effect when the big hit is achieved with the push button protruding. (A) is a timing chart in the reach effect when the push button is not protruding, and (B) is a timing chart in the reach effect when the push button is not protruding. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the effect display device in reach effect, and the operation mode of a movable accessory. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the effect display device in reach effect, and the operation mode of a movable accessory. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the effect display device in the reach effect in the modification 1 and the operation mode of a movable accessory. It is a front view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is a front view of the special variable winning ball device provided in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a perspective view in the closed state of the special variable winning ball device provided in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a perspective view in the open state of the special variable winning ball device provided in a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure example of the game control board (main board). It is a block diagram which shows the circuit configuration example of a relay board, an effect control board, a lamp driver board, and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit determination table and the small hit determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the opening pattern of the variable winning ball apparatus and the special variable winning ball apparatus in a KT state. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control process process. It is a production drawing which shows the production which is executed during a big hit. It is a production drawing which shows the production which is executed during a rush. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot related processing. It is a flowchart which shows the rush hour processing. It is a timing chart which shows the processing during a big hit in a modification. It is a production drawing which shows the production which is executed during a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the music selection process at the time of a big hit. It is a figure which shows the control example of the music selection control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a music selection process.

A mode for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on examples.

First, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 which is an example of the gaming machine will be described. In the following description, the front side of FIG. 1 will be described as the front (front, front) side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the back side will be described as the rear (back) side. In this embodiment, the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the facing surface facing the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the player side. In the description of each step in the flowchart, for example, the part described as "step S1" may be abbreviated as "S1". Further, in this embodiment, "execution" and "implementation" are synonymous.

FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko game machine 1 (hereinafter, may be abbreviated as a game machine) is roughly divided into a game board 2 (gauge board) constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame 3 (underframe) for supporting and fixing the game board 2. ) And. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. A game ball is launched from a ball launching device and driven into the game area.

A first special symbol display 4A and a second special symbol display 4B are provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). The first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B are each composed of, for example, a 7-segment or dot matrix LED (light emitting diode), and each of them is used in a special symbol game as an example of a variable display game. A special symbol (also referred to as a "special figure"), which is a plurality of types of identifiable identification information (special identification information), is variably displayed (also referred to as a variable display or a variable display). For example, the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B each variablely display a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". To do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B are composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". The present invention is not limited, and for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns having different combinations of those that are turned on by the 7-segment LED and those that are turned off may be preset as a plurality of types of special symbols. In the following, the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display 4A is also referred to as the "first special symbol", and the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the second special symbol display 4B is the "second special symbol". Also called.

Both the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B are formed in a square shape, for example. The type of the first special figure and the type of the second special figure may be the same (for example, both numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-"), and the types may be the same. It may be different. Further, the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B may be configured to variablely display numbers (or two-digit symbols) indicating, for example, "00" to "99", respectively. However, each of the segments indicating "00" to "99" may be configured to display "00" to "99" in an invisible and randomly arranged display.

An effect display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area of the game board 2. The effect display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the effect display device 5, for example, three are corresponding to each of the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 4A and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 4B. In the effect symbol display area which is a plurality of variable display units such as, the effect symbol (also referred to as a decorative symbol) which is a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can identify each is variablely displayed. The variable display of this effect symbol is also included in the variable display game.

As an example, in the display area of the effect display device 5, "left", "middle", and "right" effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged. Then, in response to the start of either the fluctuation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 4A or the fluctuation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 4B, "left". , "Middle", and "Right", the effect symbol variation (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) is started in each of the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. After that, the final effect symbols (final stop symbols) are stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" of the effect display device 5.

As described above, in the display area of the effect display device 5, the special figure game using the first special figure on the first special symbol display 4A or the second special figure on the second special symbol display 4B is used. Synchronized with the special figure game, the variable display of a plurality of types of effect symbols that can be identified by each is performed, and the definite effect symbol is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as "derivative"). It should be noted that the variation display may be temporarily stopped during the variation display of the effect symbol.

There are eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters "1" to "8" or Chinese characters) that are variablely displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. It may be a number, an English character, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, characters or symbols and a character image, and the character image may be, for example, a person or an animal, an object other than these, or an object other than these. , Characters and other symbols, or decorative images showing any other figure). Each of the production symbols is given a corresponding symbol number. For example, a symbol number of "1" to "8" is assigned to each of the alphanumeric characters indicating "1" to "8". The production symbols are not limited to eight types, and may be any number of types as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as "big hit" combinations and "missing" combinations can be configured (for example, seven types). 9 types, etc.).

After the variable display of the effect symbol is started, by the time the final effect symbol is derived and displayed, each effect symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", or the effect symbol In at least one of the display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, the "left" effect symbol display area 5L, etc.), for example, the symbol numbers flow from the upper to the lower in order from the smallest to the largest. When the scroll display is performed and the effect symbol having the maximum symbol number (for example, "8") is displayed, the effect symbol having the minimum symbol number (for example, "1") is subsequently displayed.

A first reserved storage display area 5D and a second reserved storage display area 5U are set at two locations on the left and right below the display area of the effect display device 5. In the first hold storage display area 5D and the second hold storage display area 5U, the hold storage display for identifiablely displaying the hold storage number (special figure hold storage number) of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game is performed.

Here, the holding of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game is such that the game ball passes through the first starting winning opening formed by the ordinary winning ball device 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B. It occurs based on the starting prize by (entering). That is, the start condition (also referred to as "execution condition") for executing the variable display game such as the special figure game or the variable display of the effect symbol is satisfied, but the variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. When the start condition that allows the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to the jackpot game state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Will be done. In this embodiment, the hold memory display generated based on the start winning by passing (entering) the game ball through the first starting winning opening and the starting winning by passing (entering) the game ball through the second starting winning opening. The hold storage display generated based on is set as a round white display.

In the following description, the display in the first hold storage display area 5D and the second hold storage display area 5U may be collectively referred to as hold display.

In the example shown in FIG. 1, in addition to the hold storage display area, the first hold for identifiable display of the number of special symbol hold storages on the upper and lower parts of the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B. A display 25A and a second hold display 25B are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the number of hold storages of the first special figure in a identifiable manner. The second hold indicator 25B displays the number of second special figure hold storage identifiable. The number of reserved storages in the variable display obtained by adding the number of reserved storages in the first special figure and the number of reserved storages in the second special figure is particularly referred to as the total number of reserved storages.

Below the effect display device 5, a normal winning ball device 6A and a normal variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The ordinary winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state by, for example, a predetermined ball receiving member. The ordinary variable winning ball device 6B is an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state in a vertical position and an expanded open state in a tilting position by a solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory shown in FIG. It is equipped with a tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) and forms a second start winning opening.

As an example, in the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state. It becomes a difficult normal open state. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball passes through the second starting winning opening by the tilt control in which the movable wing piece is in the tilting position when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is on. It will be in an expanded open state where it is easy to enter. Although the normally variable winning ball device 6B allows the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening even when it is in the normally open state, there is a possibility that the game ball will enter more than when it is in the expanded open state. It may be configured to be low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball device 6B may be configured so that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening, for example, by closing the second starting winning opening in the normally open state. In this way, the second start winning opening changes into an expanded open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) and a normally open state in which the game ball does not easily pass (enter) or cannot pass (enter).

The game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed in the ordinary winning ball device 6A is detected by, for example, the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by, for example, the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game balls by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first special figure reserved memory number is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "" If it is less than 4 "), the first starting condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game balls by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second special figure reserved memory number is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "" If it is less than 4 "), the second starting condition is satisfied. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. May be the same number or different numbers from each other.

A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided at a position below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door shown in FIG. 2, and a predetermined area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form a big prize opening as.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is in the off state, the large winning opening door is in the closed state and the game ball passes through (entering) the large winning opening. I can't do it. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door is on, the big winning door opens the big winning door and the game ball passes through (entering) the big winning door. ) Make it easier. In this way, the large winning opening changes into an open state in which the game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous to the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) and is disadvantageous to the player. In addition, instead of the closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enter) the large winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball does not easily pass (enter) the large winning opening may be provided.

The game ball that has passed (entered) the large winning opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) the large winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 that has been opened, the game ball passes through another winning opening (for example, the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening). More prize balls will be paid out than when passing (entering). Therefore, when the large winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened, the game ball can enter the large winning opening, which is an advantageous first state for the player. On the other hand, if the large winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 is closed, it becomes impossible or difficult for the player to pass (enter) the game ball through the large winning opening to obtain the winning ball. It becomes a disadvantageous second state.

Further, a movable accessory 400 is provided above the effect display device 5. The movable accessory 400 has a retracted position which is an upper position of the effect display device 5 shown in FIG. 1 by driving the movable accessory first drive motor 301 (see FIG. 2) and a drive mechanism (not shown), and the retracted position. It is downward and can be vertically moved between the effect display device 5 and the effect position superimposed on the effect display device 5 in the front view of the pachinko game machine 1.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a first movable portion 401 is arranged on the left portion of the movable accessory 400, and a second movable portion 402 is arranged on the right portion of the movable accessory 400. The first movable portion 401 is provided so as to be movable between the central left portion and the left end portion in the left-right width direction of the movable accessory 400, and the second movable portion 402 is provided in the left-right width direction of the movable accessory 400. It is provided so as to be movable between the central right part and the right end part. In particular, in the movable accessory 400 of the present embodiment, the first movable portion 401 and the second movable portion 402 move in conjunction with each other by driving the movable accessory second drive motor 302 (see FIG. 2) and a drive mechanism (not shown). As a result, the first movable portion 401 and the second movable portion 402 are close to each other in the central portion in the left-right width direction (see FIG. 1), and the first movable portion 401 and the second movable portion 402 are movable. It is possible to change to a separated state (see FIG. 19 (J)) in which the object 400 moves to the left end portion and the right end portion and is separated from each other. The movable accessory 400 in the present embodiment is arranged in a close state at the evacuation position, and changes to a separated state by being arranged at the effect position.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, below the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like like the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B, and has a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbol. The normal pattern (also called "normal figure" or "normal figure") is variably displayed (variable display). Such a variable display of a normal pattern is called a normal figure game (also referred to as a "normal figure game").

A normal symbol display 25C is provided on the side of the normal symbol display 20. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal figure hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 41.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. Further, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the large winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be done. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as prize balls based on the fact that the game balls that have entered any of the general prize openings are detected by the predetermined general prize ball switch. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and further, an effect LED 9 is provided around the game area.

At the lower right position of the game machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area is provided. For example, the hitting ball operation handle adjusts the elastic force of the game ball according to the amount of operation (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The ball striking operation handle may be provided with a single-shot launch switch for stopping the drive of the launch motor included in the ball striking device, or a touch ring (touch sensor).

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, an upper plate that holds (stores) the game balls paid out as prize balls and the game balls paid out by renting so that they can be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. (Striking ball supply plate) is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 3, a lower plate (not shown) is provided to hold (store) excess balls and the like overflowing from the upper plate so that they can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

Further, the upper plate is formed with a bulging portion 30 that bulges in front of the game machine, and a push button 31B that can be operated by the player is provided on the upper surface of the bulging portion 30. The push button 31B of the present embodiment is housed in the bulging portion 30 by the drive of the button drive motor 303 (see FIG. 2) and a drive mechanism (not shown), and the bulging portion 30 is more than the non-protruding state. It is provided so as to be changeable to a protruding state protruding upward, and the player can operate the push button 31B in the non-protruding state and the push button 31B in the protruding state. The push button 31B may be configured so that the pressing operation from the player can be detected mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 35B for detecting a player's pressing operation on the push button 31B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the position where the push button 31B is arranged.

The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, and an LED control board 14 as shown in FIG. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, an interface board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is equipped with various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is a sub-side control board mainly composed of a random number setting function used in a special drawing game, a function capable of inputting an output signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, an effect control board 12, and the like. It has a function to output and transmit a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function to output various information to the outside. Further, the main board 11 controls lighting / extinguishing of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B to control the lighting / extinguishing of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The variable display of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol 20 and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a control function.

On the main board 11, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110 that takes in detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100, and a game control microcomputer 100. A solenoid circuit 111 or the like that transmits a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 81 and 82 is mounted.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the effect display device 5, the speakers 8L, and 8R. And various circuits for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric parts such as the effect LED 9 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 includes the display operation of the effect display device 5, the operation of the movable accessory 400, all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, and all the lighting / extinguishing operations of the effect LED 9 and the like. Alternatively, it has a function of determining the control content for causing the electric component for the effect to execute a predetermined effect operation, such as a part. It should be noted that the configuration may not include the relay board 15.

The voice control board 13 is a control board for voice output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and is a speaker based on commands and control data (sound number, volume level, etc.) from the effect control board 12. It is equipped with a processing circuit that executes audio signal processing to output audio from 8L and 8R. The LED control board 14 is a control board for LED output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and is driven to turn on / off the effect LED 9 and the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. It is equipped with an LED driver circuit that performs the above.

As shown in FIG. 2, the main board 11 is connected to a wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23. The gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 may have an arbitrary configuration capable of detecting a game ball, such as a sensor. Just do it. Further, on the main board 11, the first special symbol display 4A, the second special symbol display 4B, the normal symbol display 20, the first hold display 25A, the second hold display 25B, and the general figure hold display 25C Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal.

FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The command form shown in FIG. 3 is an example, and other command forms may be used. Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value corresponding to the content of instruction by the effect control command.

The command 8001H is a first fluctuation start command for designating the fluctuation start on the first special symbol display 4A. The command 8002H is a second fluctuation start command for designating the fluctuation start on the second special symbol display 4B. The command 81XXH is a fluctuation pattern designation command for designating a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time), and different EXT data is set according to the designated fluctuation pattern and the like.

The command 8CXXXH is a variation display result notification command, and is an effect control command for designating the variation display result. The command 8C00H is a command indicating a pre-determined result indicating that the command is "off". The command 8C01H is a command for notifying that the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot A" in "big hit". The command 8C02H is a command for notifying that the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot B" in "big hit". Command 8C03H is a command for notifying that the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot" in "big hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the effect symbol. The command 95XXH is a game state specification command that specifies the game state at that time.

The command A0XXH is a jackpot start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the start of the jackpot gaming state. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state and that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit game state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state and that the big winning opening is in the closed state in the big hit game state. The command A3XXH is a jackpot end designation command that specifies the end of the jackpot gaming state.

In addition, in the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, for example, the number of executions of the round in the normal open big hit state or the short-term open big hit state (for example, "1" to "16" or "1" to "5" ”) Corresponding EXT data is set.

The command B100H is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition is satisfied by winning the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A. The command B200H is a second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second starting condition is satisfied by winning the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and is a ROM 101 (Read Only Memory 101) that stores a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. The RAM 102 (Random Access Memory 102) that provides the area, the CPU 103 (Central Processing Unit 103) that executes the game control program to perform the control operation, and the numerical data indicating the random value are updated independently of the CPU 103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 104 to be performed and an I / O 105 (Input / Outputport 105).

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, various processes for controlling the progress of the game are executed by executing the program read from the ROM 101 by the CPU 103.

On the main board 11, various random values such as a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random number value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, a random number value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern, and a random number value MR4 for determining a general figure display result are used. Numerical data is controlled so that it can be counted. The random number circuit 104 may be any one capable of counting numerical data indicating a part or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4, and the CPU 103 may use software for various random numbers not counted by the random number circuit 104. It suffices to count by updating the numerical data of.

FIG. 5 shows the fluctuation pattern of this embodiment. In this embodiment, a plurality of fluctuation patterns as shown in FIG. 5 are prepared in advance. Specifically, in this embodiment, among the cases where the variation display result is "off", the variation display mode of the effect symbol corresponds to the case of "non-reach" and the case of "reach", respectively. In addition, a plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the fluctuation display result is a "big hit".

A normal reach reach effect is executed for the jackpot variation pattern, which is a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is "big hit", and the reach variation pattern when the variation display mode of the effect symbol is "reach". There are a normal reach fluctuation pattern and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In this embodiment, only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like the super reach, a plurality of normal reach α, normal reach β, ... The normal reach fluctuation pattern of is also provided. Further, as for the super reach fluctuation pattern, three or more super reach fluctuation patterns such as super reach γ may be provided in addition to the super reach α and the super reach β.

As shown in FIG. 5, the special figure fluctuation time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in this embodiment is set shorter than the super reach α and super reach β which are the super reach fluctuation patterns. .. Further, regarding the special figure fluctuation time of the super reach fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of super reach β is executed is the one. However, the special figure fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is executed.

In this embodiment, as described above, the jackpot expectation (big hit reliability) at which the variable display result is "big hit" is set to be higher in the order of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach. In the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the jackpot expectation (big hit reliability). Further, in the present embodiment, when a big hit occurs, the player is always in the reach state and any one of super reach β, super reach α, and normal reach is executed, but the present invention is limited to this. It is also possible that a non-reach fluctuation pattern may be a big hit. Although the details will be described later, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach of this embodiment displays an operation promotion image and an operation promotion message prompting the player to operate the push button 31B on the effect display device 5 during the reach effect. If the variable display result is a big hit, the movable accessory 400 is operated based on the operation of the push button 31B to notify the big hit.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 stores various selection data, table data, and the like used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. .. For example, the ROM 101 stores data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables, setting tables, etc. prepared in advance for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals to be various control commands from the main board 11, and a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns as shown in FIG. Table data and the like that make up the fluctuation pattern table are stored.

FIG. 6 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the present embodiment, the display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure is used as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special figure is not limited to this. And the second special figure may use individual display result determination tables.

The display result determination table sets the variable display result as a "big hit" and puts it in a big hit game state before the confirmed special symbol is derived and displayed in the special symbol game of the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B. It is a table referred to for determining whether or not to control based on a random number value MR1.

In the display result determination table of this embodiment, a numerical value (value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state, the time saving state (low probability state), or the probability variation state (high probability state). Judgment value) is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "missing".

In the display result determination table, determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit game state. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), more judgment values than in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state) are the characteristics of the "big hit". It is assigned to the figure display result. As a result, in the probability change state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed, the probability that it is determined to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" in the big hit game state in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Compared with (about 1/300 in this embodiment), the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit gaming state is higher (about 1/30 in this embodiment). That is, in the display result determination table, when the game state is in the probability change state (high probability state), the probability of being determined to control the jackpot game state is higher than in the normal state or the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot game state.

In the ROM 101, when it is determined to control the jackpot game state, the jackpot type determination table referred to for determining the jackpot type to one of a plurality of types based on the random number value MR2, or the random number value MR3 A fluctuation pattern determination table for determining the fluctuation pattern to any of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 5 described above is also stored.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the jackpot type determination table of this embodiment, when it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" and the jackpot game state is controlled, the jackpot type is selected from any of a plurality of types based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type. It is a table referenced to determine. In the jackpot type determination table, whether the special symbol whose variation is displayed (variable) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display 4A) or the second special symbol (second special symbol). Depending on whether the game is a special figure game using the symbol display 4B), the numerical values (judgment values) to be compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type are "non-probability variation", "probability variation jackpot A", and "probability variation jackpot B". It is assigned to multiple types of jackpots such as ".

Here, the jackpot type in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 7B. In this embodiment, high accuracy control and time saving control are executed as the jackpot type after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Probability change jackpot A and probability variation jackpot B that shift to the probability high base state, and non-probability change jackpot that shifts to the low probability variation base state by executing only the time saving control after the end of the jackpot game state are set.

In the big hit game state by "probability change big hit A" and the big hit game state by "non-probability change big hit", as described above, 16 rounds (so-called) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are performed. 16 rounds), a normally open jackpot that is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, in the big hit game state by the "probability change big hit B", as described above, the round for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is repeatedly executed five times (so-called five rounds). It is a short-term open jackpot. Therefore, the "probability change jackpot A" may be referred to as a 16-round (16R) probability variation jackpot, and the "probability variation jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5-round (5R) probability variation jackpot.

The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the probability variation jackpot A and the probability variation jackpot B are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the jackpot that occurs again is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B, the high accuracy control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the jackpot gaming state, so that the jackpot gaming state does not go through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive villa state that occurs continuously.

On the other hand, the time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "non-probability change big hit" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times. It ends when it becomes a big hit game state before it is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 7 (A), "probability variation jackpot A" and "probability variation jackpot B" are set according to whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. The allocation of judgment values for the jackpot type is different. That is, when the variable special figure is the first special figure, the determination value in a predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is assigned to the big hit type of "probability variable big hit B" with a small number of rounds. On the other hand, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, the determination value is not assigned to the big hit type of "probability variation big hit B". With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display 4A is satisfied. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display 4B is satisfied. Therefore, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probability variation jackpot B" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the jackpot type is set to "probability variation jackpot B" and controlled to the short-term open jackpot state with a small number of rounds. In a game state in which a game ball easily enters the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B, the game interest is reduced by avoiding the frequent occurrence of a short-term open jackpot state in which a small number of winning balls are obtained. Can be prevented.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 7 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the jackpot type of "non-probability variation" is whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. Since it is the same regardless of the fact, the probability of becoming a non-probability jackpot and the probability of becoming a probabilistic jackpot are the same regardless of whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. ing.

Therefore, as described above, the assignment of the judgment value to the "probability change jackpot B" differs depending on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, and the "probability change jackpot A" is used. The assignment of the judgment value to "" also differs depending on whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, and for "probability variable jackpot A" with many rounds, the variable special figure is the second special figure. It is set so that the case of is easier to determine than the case of the first special figure.

Even when the variable special figure is the second special figure, a judgment value in a predetermined range different from the case where the variable special figure is the first special figure is assigned to the big hit type of "probability variable big hit B". You may. For example, when the variable special figure is the second special figure, a smaller determination value than when the variable special figure is the first special figure may be assigned to the big hit type of "probability variable big hit B". Alternatively, regardless of whether the variable special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to the common table data.

Further, as the fluctuation pattern determination table stored in the ROM 101, it was determined in advance that the fluctuation pattern determination table for big hits used when it was predetermined to be "big hit" and the fluctuation pattern determination table for big hits were "missing". A variation pattern determination table for deviation, which is sometimes used, is prepared in advance. In this embodiment, the reach fluctuation pattern is more likely to be determined when a big hit occurs than when a hit occurs, and there is a possibility (reliability or expectation) that a big hit will occur when a reach occurs. As it becomes higher, even if the fluctuation pattern of the same reach, there is a higher possibility that the super reach will be a big hit (reliability and expectation) than the normal reach, and even if it is the same super reach, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β In order to increase the possibility of a probability variation jackpot (reliability and expectation), the determination values corresponding to each variation pattern are set in the variation pattern determination table for jackpot and the variation pattern determination table for deviation. There is.

The deviation pattern determination table includes a plurality of tables corresponding to the total number of reserved storages and the time saving state, and the total number of holding storages corresponds to 2 to 4 depending on the number of reserved storages and the time saving state. Shortening non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-2), shortening non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-3) corresponding to a total of 5 to 8 reserved storages, and shortening non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern. By determining (PA1-4) according to the total number of reserved memories and the gaming state (time saving state), the shorter the total number of reserved memories is, the easier it is to execute a short fluctuation pattern, that is, the fluctuation per unit time. By increasing the number of times, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of unnecessary start winnings, and during the time reduction control (during the time reduction state), the fluctuation pattern of the shortened non-reach outlier is higher than when the time reduction control is not executed. By determining a large number of (PA1-4) and increasing the number of fluctuations per unit time, the period until the next big hit can be shortened, and the player's feeling of consecutive villas can be improved.

The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is backed up by a backup power source from a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied with power). , When the power is turned on again, the data indicating the progress state of the game, such as the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (special figure process flag, etc.) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls, will be inherited. do it.

Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game. In the game control data holding area, the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A, and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated, but the first starting winning is not yet started. As the hold data of the special figure game using the special figure, the first special figure hold storage unit for storing the random value MR1, the random value MR2, the numerical data indicating the random value MR3, and the like, and the normal variable winning ball device 6B are formed. Random value MR1 as the pending data of the special figure game using the second special figure that has not been started yet although the game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning opening and the start winning (second starting winning) has occurred. , The second special figure holding storage unit that stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 and the random number value MR3, the normal figure holding storage unit, and the state can be updated according to the progress of the game such as the special figure process flag. A game control flag setting unit provided with a plurality of types of flags, a game control timer setting unit provided with various counters used to control the progress of the game, and a game control timer setting unit for controlling the progress of the game. A game control counter setting unit provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used, and various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game are provided. It is equipped with a game control buffer setting unit.

As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 provides an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area of the effect control CPU 120. RAM 122, a display control unit 123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation on the effect display device 5, and a numerical data indicating a random number value are updated independently of the effect control CPU 120. A random number circuit 124 and an I / O 125 are mounted.

As an example, in the effect control board 12, various processes for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric components are executed by executing the effect control program read from the ROM 121 by the effect control CPU 120. For example, as a process for controlling these effect operations, a reception process in which the effect control CPU 120 receives input of various signals from the outside of the effect control board 12 via the I / O 125, and an effect control CPU 120 via the I / O 125. The transmission process of outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 is also performed.

On the side of the effect control board 12, as in the case of the main board 11, for example, various random numbers (also referred to as effect random numbers) for determining execution / non-execution of various effects, type of effect, and the like are set. Has been done. Further, in the ROM 121, in addition to the effect control program, various table data used for controlling the effect operation of the movable accessory 400, for example, execution / non-execution of various effects, type of effect, etc. Table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables for determining the above, pattern data that constitutes an effect control pattern corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, and the like are stored.

Among the effect control patterns, the effect control pattern at the time of special symbol change corresponds to each variation pattern, and the variation display of the effect symbol during the period from the start of the variation of the special symbol to the derivation display of the confirmed special symbol. It is composed of data showing the control contents of various production operations such as movement and reach effect for operating the movable accessory 400.

Further, the RAM 122 is provided with, for example, an effect control data holding area (not shown) as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. The effect control data holding area includes an effect control flag setting unit provided with a plurality of types of flags that can update the state according to the effect operation state, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, and various effect operations. The effect control timer setting unit and the effect control counter setting unit provided with multiple types of timers and counters used to control the progress of the effect, and the data used to control the progress of various effect operations are temporarily stored. It is equipped with an effect control buffer setting unit in which various buffers for storing are provided.

In this embodiment, a storage area (buffer number "1-1") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages of the first special figure reserved storage is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit. ~ "Area corresponding to" 1-4 ") and storage area (buffer numbers" 2-1 "to" 2- "corresponding to the maximum value (for example," 4 ") of the total number of reserved storages in the second special figure reserved storage. An area corresponding to "4") is provided, and data constituting a hold storage buffer capable of specifying the status of hold storage at that time is stored, and a first hold storage display is performed based on the data of the hold storage buffer. The hold display of the area 5D and the second hold storage display area 5U is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 includes a movable accessory first drive motor 301 for driving the movable accessory 400 in the vertical direction, a first drive unit constituting the movable accessory 400, and the like. A movable accessory second drive motor 302 for driving the second drive unit (see FIG. 1) in the horizontal direction and a button drive motor 303 for changing the push button 31B from the non-protruding state to the protruding state are connected. Has been done. The effect control CPU 120 individually controls the movable accessory 400 and the push button 31B by individually controlling the movable accessory first drive motor 301, the movable accessory second drive motor 302, and the button drive motor 303. It is possible to do.

Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be described. When the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started on the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 sets the interrupt disabled and then performs the necessary initial settings. In this initial setting, for example, RAM 102 is cleared. In addition, the register of the CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set. As a result, after that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process. When the initial setting is completed, interrupts are permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, the process for returning the internal state of the pachinko game machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed, and then the loop process may be started.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 8 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. The state of the detection signal input from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (S11). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (S12). After that, a predetermined information output process is executed (S13).

Next, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as the random number values MR1 to MR4 by software is executed (S14). After that, the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 9 is executed (S15).

Following the special symbol process processing, the display operation on the normal symbol display 20 (for example, turning on and off the segment LED) is controlled to display the fluctuation of the normal symbol and tilt the movable wing piece of the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The normal symbol process process for setting the operation and the like is executed (S16). After that, by executing the command control process, the control command is transmitted (output) from the main board 11 to the control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 (S17).

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. In this special symbol process process, first, the start winning prize determination process is executed (S21). After that, any of the processes S22 to S29 is selected and executed according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152.

In the start winning process of S21, it is determined whether or not there is a first start winning or a second starting winning by the first starting port switch 22A or the second starting port switch 22B, and if there is a winning, the random number value MR1. MR2 and MR3 are extracted and stored at the top of the empty entry in the first special figure reservation storage unit when the first start prize is won, and when the second start prize is won, the second special figure is reserved. Store at the top level of free entries in the storage.

The special symbol normal processing of S22 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In the special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending data. Further, based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR1, it is determined (predetermined) whether or not the variation display result is a “big hit” before the variation display result is derived and displayed. Further, a fixed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a missed symbol) is set according to the variable display result. Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1".

The fluctuation pattern setting process of S23 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. The variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types using numerical data indicating a random value MR3 based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the variation display result is a "big hit". It is included. Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2".

The special symbol variation process of S24 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In the special symbol change process, the process of making settings for changing the special symbol on the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol starts to change. It includes processing to measure. When the change elapsed time of the special symbol reaches the special figure fluctuation time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "3".

The special symbol stop processing of S25 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. The special symbol stop process includes a process of setting the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B to stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the variable display result of the special symbol. It has been. Then, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is on, and if the jackpot flag is on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

The jackpot opening pre-processing of S26 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. In the big hit pre-opening process, based on the fact that the variable display result is "big hit", etc., the process of starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state and setting to open the big winning opening is performed. include. Specifically, the upper limit of the period for opening the big winning opening is set to "29 seconds", and the number of opening of the big winning opening, which is the upper limit of the number of rounds to be executed, is set to "non-probable big hit" or "probable change". If it is a big hit A, it is set to "16 times". On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot B", the number of times the jackpot is opened, which is the upper limit of the number of rounds to be executed, is set to "5". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5".

The process of opening the jackpot in S27 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is measured based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. ..

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in S28 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening of the big hit, the process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round in which the big winning opening is opened has reached the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening, and the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening have been reached. In some cases, it includes processing to make settings for sending the jackpot end specification command. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the maximum number of large winning opening openings, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the maximum number of large winning opening openings is reached, the special figure The value of the process flag is updated to "7".

The jackpot end processing of S29 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. The jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the ending effect for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed has elapsed. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0".

In the jackpot end processing, the jackpot type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit is read out, and whether the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot", "probability variation jackpot A", or "probability variation jackpot B" is determined. Identify. Then, when it is determined that the specified jackpot type is not "non-probability variation jackpot", a setting (set of probability variation flag) for starting probability variation control is performed.

In addition, when the specified jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot", the setting for starting the time reduction control (the set of the time reduction flag and the upper limit value of the special figure game that can be executed during the time reduction control are supported in advance. The predetermined count initial value (“100” in this embodiment) is set in the time reduction counter).

Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. First, when the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 starts executing the effect control main process shown in FIG. In the effect control main process, first, initialization process is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing the timer for determining the effect control activation interval (for example, 2 ms) (S51). ). After that, the effect control CPU 120 shifts to the loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (S52). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 120 sets the timer interrupt flag by the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set (on) in the main process, the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (S53) and executes the following process.

The effect control CPU 120 first performs a command analysis process (S54). In the command analysis process, which command (see FIG. 3) is the command transmitted from the main board 11 stored in the received command buffer is analyzed. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in the buffer area formed in the RAM. Then, a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command is performed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect control process process (S55). In the effect control process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from each process according to the control state, and the display control of the effect display device 5 is executed.

Next, an effect random number update process for updating the count value of the counter for generating an effect random number such as a jackpot symbol determination random number is executed (S56), and then the process proceeds to S52.

FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the effect control process process (S55) of the effect control main process. In the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 120 first sets the hold storage display in the first hold storage display area 5D and the second hold storage display area 5U of the effect display device 5 according to the storage contents of the hold storage buffer. The hold display update process for updating the display is executed (S72).

After that, the effect control CPU 120 performs any of the processes S73 to S79 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following processes are executed.

Variation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S73): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern designation command has been received from the game control microcomputer 100. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the fluctuation pattern specification command is received in the command analysis process. If the variation pattern specification command is received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (S74).

Effect symbol variation start process (S74): Control is performed so that the effect symbol variation is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (S75).

Processing during effect symbol change (S75): Controls the switching timing of each change state (fluctuation speed) constituting the change pattern, and monitors the end of the change time. Then, when the fluctuation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (S76).

Effect symbol fluctuation stop processing (S76): Control to stop the variation of the effect symbol and derive and display the display result (stop symbol) based on the reception of the effect control command (symbol confirmation command) instructing to stop all symbols. Do. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (S77) or the variation pattern designation command reception wait process (S73).

Big hit display process (S77): After the end of the fluctuation time, the effect display device 5 is controlled to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of the big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot game in-game process (S78).

Process during big hit game (S78): Control during big hit game. For example, when a designated command during opening of the large winning opening or a designated command after opening the large winning opening is received, the display control of the number of rounds in the effect display device 5 is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end effect process (S79).

Big hit end effect processing (S79): In the effect display device 5, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern designation command reception waiting process (S73).

FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (S74) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is set in S271 (S271). When the first fluctuation start command reception flag is set (S271; Y), various command data and various types stored in association with the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4". The flag is shifted upward by one buffer number (S272). The contents of the buffer number "1-1" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not set in S271 (S271; N), it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation start command reception flag is set (S273). If the second variation start command reception flag is not set (S273; N), the effect symbol variation start process is terminated, and if the second variation start command reception flag is set (S273; Y), the buffer The various command data and various flags stored in association with the areas corresponding to the numbers "2-1" to "2-4" are shifted upward by one buffer number (S274). The contents of the buffer number "2-1" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

After executing S272 or S274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (S275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the effect symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (S276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the effect symbol according to the display result specified by the display result specification command, and stores the data indicating the stop symbol of the determined effect symbol in the effect symbol display result storage area. To do.

In this embodiment, when the received variation display result specification command is the second variation display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, three symbols "7" as stop symbols. Determine the combination of the production symbols (big hit symbol) aligned with. Further, when the received variation display result specification command is the third variation display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, "111") are used as stop symbols. It is determined from the combination of production symbols such as "333", "555", and "999"). Further, when the received variation display result specification command is the fourth variation display result specification command corresponding to the non-probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 may, for example, have an even number of three symbols as stop symbols. Determine the combination (big hit symbol). Further, when the received variation display result designation command is the first variation display result specification command corresponding to the loss, the combination of the effect symbols (the missed symbols) in which the three symbols are not uniform is determined as the stop symbol.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 uses, for example, a stop symbol determination table in which random numbers for determining the stop symbols are extracted and data indicating a combination of effect symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the effect symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of effect symbols corresponding to the numerical values corresponding to the extracted random numbers.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 identifies the variation pattern of the variation display from the variation pattern designation command read in S275, and determines whether or not the variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern (S277). In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (S277; Y), the push button is displayed on the effect display device 5 when displaying the operation promotion image and the operation promotion message prompting the player to operate the push button 31B during the reach effect. Whether or not to change 31B to the protruding state is determined and stored based on a push button protrusion determination table (not shown), a variation display result, and a random value for push button protrusion determination (S278).

In S278, as shown in FIG. 13, when the variation display result is "off", the execution of the protrusion (change to the protruding state) of the push button 31B is determined at a rate of 10%, and 90%. The non-execution of the protrusion of the push button 31B is determined by the ratio of. When the variation display result is "big hit", the execution of the protrusion of the push button 31B (change to the protruding state) is determined at a rate of 90%, and the protrusion of the push button 31B is not executed at a rate of 10%. To determine. In this way, when the variable display result is "big hit", the execution of the protrusion (change to the protruding state) of the push button 31B is determined at a higher rate than when the variable display result is "missing". Since the operation promotion image and the operation promotion message prompting the operation of the push button 31B are displayed on the effect display device 5, the player can pay attention to whether or not the push button 31B changes to the protruding state. You can improve the game fun.

Then, when it is not the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (S277; N) or after the execution of S278, the effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the presence / absence of protrusion of the push button 31B and the fluctuation pattern designation command is selected. Then, the variable process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (S282).

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the effect display device 5, LED control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. The sound control execution data, the movable accessory control execution data for controlling the operation of the movable accessory 400, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B, and the like are each process data n (1 to N). It is arranged in order in chronological order in association with (up to number).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 produces the effect according to the contents of the variable process data 1 (display control execution data 1, LED control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, movable accessory control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). Control of the device (effect display device 5 as an effect component, various LEDs as an effect component, speakers 8L, 8R as an effect component, movable accessory 400, operation unit (push button 31B, etc.)) is executed ( S283). For example, the effect display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various LEDs, a control signal (LED control execution data) is output to the LED control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern designation command so that the variation display of the effect symbol according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one is performed, but the effect control CPU 120 specifies the variation pattern. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the command.

Then, a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is set in the fluctuation time timer (S284). Further, a predetermined time is set in the fluctuation control timer (S285). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms. Every time the predetermined time elapses, the effect control CPU 120 writes the image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right effect symbols to the VRAM, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. The effect symbol changes are realized by outputting the signal corresponding to the image data to the effect display device 5 and displaying the image according to the signal by the effect display device 5. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (S75) (S286).

FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol changing process (S75) in the effect control process process. In the effect symbol variation processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets the respective values of the variation process timer, the variation time timer, and the variation control timer to -1 (S301, S302, S303).

In S304, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable process timer has timed out. If the variable process timer is out of timer (S304; Y), the variable process data is switched (S305). That is, the variable process timer is started again by setting the next set process timer setting value in the process table in the variable process timer (S306). In addition, the control state for the effect device (effect component) is based on the display control execution data, LED control execution data, sound control execution data, movable accessory control execution data, operation unit control execution data, etc. that are set next. Is changed (S307). On the other hand, when the variable process timer is not timer-out (S304; N), the contents of the variable process data corresponding to the variable process timer (display control execution data, LED control execution data, sound control execution data, movable accessory control). Control of the effect device (effect component) is executed according to execution data, operation unit control execution data, etc. (S308).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display is a fluctuation pattern of super reach (S309). If the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display is not the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (S309; N), the process proceeds to S324, and if the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display is the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (S309; Y), the push button 31B It is determined whether or not the push button operation acceptance flag indicating that the operation has been accepted is set (S310). If the push button operation reception flag is set (S310; Y), the process proceeds to S323, and if the push button operation reception flag is not set, whether or not the change to the protruding state of the push button 31B is determined. Is determined (S311).

If the change of the push button 31B to the protruding state is not determined (S311; N), the process proceeds to S314, and if the change of the push button 31B to the protruding state is determined (S311; Y), the variable process data It is determined whether or not the button drive motor 303 is in the driving period with reference to (S312). If the button drive motor 303 is not in the drive period (S312; N), the process proceeds to S314, and if the button drive motor 303 is in the drive period (S312; Y), the button drive motor 303 is driven to proceed to S314 ( S313).

In S314, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the operation acceptance start timing of the push button 31B with reference to the variable process data. If it is not the operation reception start timing of the push button 31B (S314; N), the process proceeds to S316, and if it is the operation reception start timing of the push button 31B (S314; Y), the presence / absence of protrusion of the push button 31B (push button 31B). The effect display device 5 starts displaying the operation promotion image according to (determination of whether or not to change to the protruding state) (S315a). Further, the effect display device 5 starts displaying an operation promotion message prompting the player to operate the push button 31B (S315b). Then, the process proceeds to S316.

In S316, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the push button 31B is in the operation acceptance period with reference to the variable process data. If the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is not in progress (S316; N), the process proceeds to S324, and if the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B is in progress (S316; Y), whether or not the operation acceptance of the push button 31B is further performed. (Whether or not the push button 31B has been operated) is determined (S317). In the present embodiment, the timing for determining that the push button 31B has been operated is the timing when the push sensor 35 detects the end of the operation of the push button 31B by the player, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the timing for determining that the push button 31B has been operated may be the timing at which the push sensor 35 detects the start of operation of the push button 31B by the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, the movable accessory 400 moves (falls) from the retracted position to the effect position based on the operation of the push button 31B by the player, so that the variable display result becomes a big hit. Although the form of notifying is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation mode of the push button 31B by the player is not only one operation (single push) in a short period of time but also continuous operation (one-shot push). Only one of the operation modes such as long press) and multiple operation (continuous hitting) may be provided, or a plurality of operation modes may be provided.

If there is an operation reception of the push button 31B (S317; Y), the process proceeds to S321a, and if there is no operation reception of the push button 31B (S317; N), it is further determined whether or not it is the end timing of the operation reception of the push button 31B. Judgment (S319). If it is the operation reception end timing of the push button 31B (S319; Y), the process proceeds to S321a, and if it is not the operation reception end timing of the push button 31B (S319; N), the process proceeds to S322.

In S321a, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the fact that the push button 31B is operated during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, or that the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B ends without the push button 31B being operated. And set the push button operation reception flag. Further, the display of the operation promotion message is finished and the process proceeds to S322 while maintaining the display of the operation promotion image on the effect display device 5 (S321b).

In S322, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the push button operation reception flag is set. If the push button operation reception flag is set (S322; Y), the process proceeds to S323, and if the push button operation reception flag is not set, the process proceeds to S324. In S323, the effect control CPU 120 has operated the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, or the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B has ended without the push button 31B being operated. The post-operation effect execution process for executing the post-operation effect is executed based on the above, and the process proceeds to S324.

Next, it is confirmed whether or not the fluctuation control timer is timer-out (S324). When the fluctuation control timer is out of the timer (S324; Y), the effect control CPU 120 is displayed on the next display screen of the effect symbol on the left, middle, and right (30 ms after the previous display switching time of the effect symbol). The image data of the screen) is created and written in a predetermined area of VRAM (S325). In this way, the effect display device 5 realizes fluctuation control of the effect symbol. The display control unit 123 outputs a signal based on data obtained by superimposing image data of a predetermined area such as a set background image and image data based on display control execution data set in the process table to the effect display device 5. Output. In this way, the effect display device 5 displays the background image, the character image, and the effect symbol in the variation of the effect symbol. Further, a predetermined value is reset in the fluctuation control timer (S326).

If the fluctuation control timer is not timered out (S324; N), after the execution of S326, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the fluctuation time timer is timered out (S327). If the fluctuation time timer is out of timer, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (S76) (S329). Even if the fluctuation time timer is not timer-out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is set (S328; Y), the value of the effect control process flag is set to the effect symbol fluctuation stop processing ( The value is updated according to S76) (S329). Even if the fluctuation time timer is not timered out, the control shifts to stop the fluctuation when the symbol confirmation specification command is received. Therefore, for example, a fluctuation pattern specification command indicating a long fluctuation time due to noise between boards is used. Even if it is received, the fluctuation of the effect symbol can be terminated when the regular fluctuation time elapses (at the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol).

In the process table used for controlling the fluctuation of the effect symbol, the process data during the variation display of the effect symbol is set. That is, the sum of the process timer setting values of the process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the fluctuation time of the effect symbol. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n in the process of S304 times out, there is no process data (display control execution data, LED control execution data, etc.) to be switched, and the effect control of the effect symbol based on the process table ends. To do.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a post-operation effect execution process (S323) in the effect symbol changing process. In the post-operation effect execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the post-operation effect process timer is operating (S401). If the post-operation effect process timer is operating (S401; Y), the process proceeds to S408, and if the post-operation effect process timer is not operating (S401; N), it is determined whether or not the variation display result is a big hit. (S402). If the variation display result is a big hit (S402; Y), select the post-operation effect effect process table for the jackpot (S403), and if the variation display result is out of order (S402; N), the post-operation effect process for the loss. Select a table (S404).

Then, after the execution of S403 or S404, the post-operation effect process timer in the process data 1 of the selected post-operation effect process table is started (S405).

In the post-operation effect process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the effect display device 5, LED control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and control of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are displayed. The sound control execution data for controlling the operation, the movable accessory control execution data for controlling the operation of the movable accessory 400, and the like are sequentially arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). ing.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 is subjected to an effect device (for effect) according to the contents of the post-operation effect process data 1 (display control execution data 1, LED control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, movable accessory control execution data 1,). Control of the effect display device 5 as a component, various LEDs as an effect component, speakers 8L, 8R as an effect component, a movable accessory 400, etc.)) is executed (S406). For example, the effect display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the variable display result. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various LEDs, a control signal (LED control execution data) is output to the LED control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13. Further, in order to operate the movable accessory 400, the movable accessory first drive motor 301 and the movable accessory second drive motor 302 are driven. Further, the operation promotion image displayed on the effect display device 5 is started to be updated as a post-operation image, and the post-operation effect execution process is completed (S407).

Further, in S408, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the post-operation effect process timer to -1. Then, it is determined whether or not the post-operation effect process timer has timed out (S409). When the post-operation effect process timer is out of timer (S409; Y), the post-operation effect process data is switched (S410). That is, the post-operation effect process timer is started again by setting the next set process timer setting value in the post-operation effect process table in the post-operation effect process timer (S411). Further, the control state for the effect device (effect component) is changed based on the display control execution data, the LED control execution data, the sound control execution data, the movable accessory control execution data, etc., which are set next (S412). .. On the other hand, when the post-operation effect process timer is not timer-out (S409; N), the contents of the post-operation effect process data corresponding to the post-operation effect process timer (display control execution data, LED control execution data, sound control execution). Control of the effect device (effect component) is executed according to data, movable accessory control execution data, etc. (S413).

Then, after the execution of S412 or S413, the post-operation image displayed on the effect display device 5 is updated (S414), and it is determined whether or not the variation display result is a big hit (S415). If the variation display result is out of alignment (S415; N), the post-operation effect execution process is terminated, and if the variation display result is a big hit (S415; Y), the forward rotation drive of the movable accessory first drive motor 301 It is determined whether or not it is during the period, that is, whether or not it is during the moving period from the retracted position of the movable accessory 400 to the effect position (S416). When the movable accessory first drive motor 301 is in the forward rotation drive period (S416; Y), the movable accessory 1st drive motor 301 is driven in the forward rotation to move the movable accessory 400 toward the effect position. , S418 (S417). Further, when the movable accessory first drive motor 301 is not in the normal rotation drive period (S416; N), the process proceeds to S418 without passing through S417.

In S418, whether or not the effect control CPU 120 is in the reverse drive period of the movable accessory first drive motor 301, that is, whether or not the effect position of the movable accessory 400 is in the moving period from the effect position to the evacuation position. Is determined. When the movable accessory first drive motor 301 is in the reverse drive period (S418; Y), the movable accessory 1st drive motor 301 is driven in the reverse direction to move the movable accessory 400 toward the retracted position. Proceed to S420 (S419). If the movable accessory first drive motor 301 is not in the reverse drive period (S418; N), the process proceeds to S420 without going through S419.

In S420, the effect control CPU 120 sets the movable accessory 400 in the normal rotation drive period of the movable accessory second drive motor 302, that is, in the state where the movable accessory 400 is located at the effect position. It is determined whether or not the period is changing from the proximity state in which the first movable portion 401 and the second movable portion 402 are close to each other to the separated state in which the first movable portion 401 and the second movable portion 402 are separated from each other. When the movable accessory second drive motor 302 is in the forward rotation drive period (S420; Y), the movable accessory 400 is changed to a separated state by driving the movable accessory second drive motor 302 in the forward rotation. (S421), the effect image corresponding to the movement of the movable accessory 400 to the retracted position is displayed on the effect display device 5, and the process proceeds to S423 (S422). Further, when the movable accessory second drive motor 302 is not in the normal rotation drive period (S420; N), the image of the push button 31B is being displayed on the effect display device 5 without passing through S421 and S422. If there is, the display of the image of the push button 31B is continued and the process proceeds to S423.

In S423, the effect control CPU 120 is in the reverse drive period of the movable accessory second drive motor 302, that is, in the state where the movable accessory 400 is located at the effect position, the first movable portion 401 and the first movable portion 401. 2 It is determined whether or not the movable portion 402 is in the moving period from the separated position to the close position. When the movable accessory second drive motor 302 is in the reverse drive period (S423; Y), the first movable portion 401 and the second movable portion 402 are brought close to each other by reversely driving the movable accessory second drive motor 302. It is moved toward the position to end the post-operation effect execution process (S424). If the second drive motor 302 of the movable accessory is not in the reverse drive period (S423; N), the post-operation effect execution process is terminated without going through S424.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect symbol change start process, the effect symbol change process, and the post-operation effect execution process, so that the push button 31B does not protrude in the super reach variation display (effect symbol change). When it is determined in S278 of the start process that the change from the non-protruding state to the protruding state of the push button 31B is not executed), when the variation display result is a big hit, as shown in FIG. 16A, the period from the start of the variation. From the timing when L1 has elapsed (timing during the execution of the reach effect), the effect display device 5 starts displaying the image of the non-protruding push button 31B as the operation promotion image and the operation promotion message. Then, when the push button 31B is operated during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B or the operation acceptance period elapses without the push button 31B being operated, the timing at which the operation of the push button 31B is accepted, or The display of the operation promotion message ends at the timing when the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B ends.

Further, after the operation which is the operation promotion image (the image of the push button 31B in the non-protruding state) from the timing when the operation of the push button 31B is accepted or the timing when the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B ends to the period L2. The image is erased from the effect display device 5. Further, the movable accessory 400 is retracted as shown in FIG. 1 from the timing when the operation of the push button 31B is accepted or the timing when the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B ends to the period L3 which is a period longer than the period L2. The movement (fall) from the position toward the effect position superimposed on the effect display device 5 is executed.

After the movement of the movable accessory 400 to the effect position is completed, the movable accessory 400 is changed from the close state to the separated state at the effect position by moving the first movable portion 401 and the second movable portion 402, and then the movable accessory 400 is movable. The accessory 400 is changed from the separated state to the close state. Then, the movable accessory 400 is moved from the effect position to the retracted position again, and the variation display ends.

When the push button 31B is projected in the fluctuation display of the super reach (when it is determined to execute the change from the non-protruding state to the protruding state of the push button 31B in S278 of the effect symbol fluctuation start processing), the fluctuation display result becomes a big hit. As shown in FIG. 16B, the image and operation of the push button 31B in the protruding state as the operation promotion image on the effect display device 5 from the timing when the period L1 elapses from the start of the fluctuation (timing during the reach effect execution). The display of the promotion message starts. The push button 31B changes from the non-protruding state to the protruding state immediately before the timing before the display start of the operation promotion image or the operation promotion message during the reach effect. Then, when the push button 31B is operated during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B or the operation acceptance period elapses without the push button 31B being operated, the timing at which the operation of the push button 31B is accepted, or The display of the operation promotion message ends at the timing when the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B ends.

Further, the movable accessory 400 is superimposed on the effect display device 5 from the retracted position shown in FIG. 1 from the timing when the operation of the push button 31B is accepted or the timing when the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B ends to the period L3. The movement (fall) toward the production position to be performed is executed.

Further, during the moving (falling) period from the retracted position of the movable accessory 400 to the effect position, the post-operation image, which is the operation promotion image (the image of the push button 31B in the protruding state), is displayed in the non-projection state as the post-operation effect. Update to the image of push button 31B. In this way, by executing the post-operation effect in conjunction with the movement of the movable accessory 400 from the retracted position to the effect position, the image of the push button 31B in which the movable accessory 400 that falls to the player is projected. Can be manipulated to make it appear to change to a non-protruding state.

In this embodiment, by updating the image of the push button 31B in the protruding state, which is the image after the operation, to the image of the push button 31B in the non-protruding state, the falling movable accessory 400 is the push button 31B in the protruding state. Although the embodiment in which the image is manipulated to appear to be changed to the non-protruding state is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image of the push button 31B in the protruding state, which is the post-operation image, is movable. If the accessory 400 can be made to appear to the player to operate the image of the push button 31B in the protruding state, the image may be updated to a different image from the image of the push button 31B in the non-protruding state. ..

After the update of the image of the non-protruding push button 31B, which is the post-operation image, is completed as the post-operation effect, the image of the non-protruding push button 31B is erased from the effect display device 5 over the period L2. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 16B, the timing at which the erasing of the image of the push button 31B after changing from the protruding state to the non-protruding state ends is from the retracted position of the movable accessory 400 to the effect position. Although it is the same timing as the movement completion timing to, the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing and the movable timing at which the erasing of the image of the push button 31B after changing from the protruding state to the non-protruding state is completed. The timing may be different from the timing at which the movement of the accessory 400 from the retracted position to the effect position is completed.

After the movement of the movable accessory 400 to the effect position is completed, the movable accessory 400 is changed from the close state to the separated state at the effect position by moving the first movable portion 401 and the second movable portion 402. At the timing when the change of the movable accessory 400 to the separated state is completed, the effect image indicating that the movable accessory 400 has changed to the separated state at the effect position is displayed on the effect display device 5. Then, after changing the movable accessory 400 from the separated state to the close state, the movable accessory 400 is moved from the effect position to the retracted position again, and the variation display ends.

The push button 31B is not projected in the fluctuation display of the super reach (when it is determined in S278 of the effect symbol fluctuation start processing that the change from the non-protruding state to the protruding state of the push button 31B is not executed), the fluctuation display result is out of alignment. In this case, as shown in FIG. 17A, an image of the non-protruding push button 31B as an operation promotion image is displayed on the effect display device 5 from the timing when the period L1 elapses from the start of the fluctuation (timing during the reach effect execution). And the display of the operation promotion message is started. Then, when the push button 31B is operated during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B or the operation acceptance period elapses without the push button 31B being operated, the timing at which the operation of the push button 31B is accepted, or The display of the operation promotion message ends at the timing when the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B ends.

Further, after the operation which is the operation promotion image (the image of the push button 31B in the non-protruding state) from the timing when the operation of the push button 31B is accepted or the timing when the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B ends to the period L2. The image is erased from the effect display device 5. Then, the movable accessory 400 moves from the retracted position to the effect position (without falling), and the variation display ends.

When the push button 31B is projected in the fluctuation display of the super reach (when the execution of the change from the non-protruding state to the protruding state of the push button 31B is determined in S278 of the effect symbol fluctuation start processing), the fluctuation display result is out of alignment. As shown in FIG. 17B, the image and operation of the push button 31B in the protruding state as the operation promotion image on the effect display device 5 from the timing when the period L1 elapses from the start of the fluctuation (timing during the reach effect execution). The display of the promotion message starts. The push button 31B changes from the non-protruding state to the protruding state immediately before the timing before the display start of the operation promotion image or the operation promotion message during the reach effect. Then, when the push button 31B is operated during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B or the operation acceptance period elapses without the push button 31B being operated, the timing at which the operation of the push button 31B is accepted, or The display of the operation promotion message ends at the timing when the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B ends.

Then, from the timing when the operation of the push button 31B is accepted or the timing when the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B ends to the period L2, the operation promotion image (the image of the push button 31B in the protruding state) is the post-operation image. Is erased from the effect display device 5. Then, the variable display ends without the movable accessory 400 moving (falling) from the retracted position to the effect position.

Next, the display mode of the effect display device 5 and the operation mode of the movable accessory 400 when it is determined to project the push button 31B in the variable display of the super reach will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19. ..

First, as shown in FIGS. 18A to 18D, when the effect symbols are a combination of reach in a state where the movable accessory 400 is arranged at the retracted position, the effect display device 5 performs a reach effect (super). Reach production) is started. During the super reach effect, when a predetermined time elapses, the non-protruding push button 31B is changed to the protruding state by driving the button drive motor 303. Then, as shown in FIG. 18E, the effect display device 5 displays an image of the push button 31B in a protruding state as an operation promotion image and an operation promotion message such as "press !!", and the operation of the push button 31B is performed. Acceptance will start.

When the player operates the push button 31B during the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B, or the operation acceptance period of the push button 31B ends without the player operating the push button 31B, FIGS. 19 (F) to 19 (F) to FIG. As shown in 19 (H), the operation promotion message is erased from the effect display device 5, and the movable accessory 400 starts moving (falling) from the retracted position to the effect position. Further, in conjunction with the movement (fall) of the movable accessory 400, the image of the push button 31B in the protruding state as an image after the operation is gradually updated to the image of the push button 31B in the non-protruding state.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 19 (I) and 19 (J), when the movement (fall) of the movable accessory 400 to the effect position and the update of the non-protruding push button 31B to the image are completed, the effect display is displayed. The display of the image of the push button 31B in the non-protruding state is finished as the image after the operation by the device 5, and the movable accessory 400 changes from the close state to the separated state. In addition, the effect image is displayed on the effect display device 5.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19, the movable accessory 400 is dropped as a post-operation effect based on the player operating the push button 31B in the protruding state. At the same time, by updating (changing) the image of the protruding push button 31B displayed on the effect display device 5 to the image of the non-protruding push button 31B, the movable accessory 400 is as if the push button 31B in the protruding state. Since it is possible to make the image appear to be manipulated, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by responding to the movement of the movable accessory 400 and the change in the display mode of the image of the push button 31B. In the present embodiment, as an example in which the image of the push button 31B in the protruding state, which is an operation promotion image, is changed, a mode in which the image of the push button 31B in the non-protruding state is updated is disclosed. The change in the image of the push button 31B in the protruding state, which is an operation promotion image, is not limited to this, and is further produced after the image of the push button 31B is changed to the image of the push button 31B in the non-protruding state. It may include until it is erased from the display device 5.

In the present embodiment, the movable accessory 400 is dropped to make it appear as if the image of the push button 31B in the protruding state is operated, but the present invention is limited to this. The operation mode of the movable accessory 400 may be other than dropping, as long as it is possible to make the image of the push button 31B in the protruding state appear to be operated.

Further, in the post-operation effect, the image of the push button 31B in the protruding state is updated to the image of the push button 31B in the non-protruding state in response to the drop of the movable accessory 400, so that the movable accessory 400 can be dropped. Since it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the display mode of the image of the push button 31B has changed, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, in the post-operation effect, after the image of the push button 31B in the protruding state is updated to the image of the push button 31B in the non-protruding state in response to the drop of the movable accessory 400, the image of the push button 31B in the non-protruding state is displayed. By erasing from the effect display device 5, it is possible to improve the effect of dropping the movable accessory 400 in the post-operation effect.

In the post-operation effect of this embodiment, the image of the push button 31B in the protruding state is updated to the image of the push button 31B in the non-protruding state in response to the drop of the movable accessory 400, and then the push button 31B in the non-protruding state is updated. Although the embodiment of erasing the image of the above from the effect display device 5 is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the post-operation effect, the image of the push button 31B in a protruding state in response to the drop of the movable accessory 400. May be erased without updating to the image of the non-protruding push button 31B, or the image of the protruding push button 31B may be deleted from the non-protruding push button 31B in response to the fall of the movable accessory 400. After updating to the image, it may not be erased from the effect display device 5. That is, in the present invention, "to change the display mode of the image corresponding to the operating body (the image of the push button 31B in the protruding state) according to the operation of the movable body (movable accessory 400), the push button in the protruding state is used. Both updating the image of the push button 31B to the image of the push button 31B in the non-protruding state and erasing the image of the push button 31B from the effect display device 5 are included.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the post-operation image of the push button 31B is erased from the effect display device 5 after the post-operation effect is started, the image of the push button 31B corresponds to the fall of the movable accessory 400. Since it becomes easier for the player to recognize that has been deleted, the game interest can be improved.

Further, if the variation display result is out of alignment in the variation display of the super reach, that is, if the movable accessory 400 is not moved (falling) as a post-operation effect based on the operation of the push button 31B, the push in the protruding state is performed. The image of the push button 31B is erased from the effect display device 5 over the period L2 in both the case where the button 31B is operated and the case where the non-protruding push button 31B is operated, that is, the same timing. Since the image of the push button 31B is erased from the effect display device 5, the movable accessory 400 moves between the case where the protruding push button 31B is operated and the case where the non-protruding push button 31B is operated. The display period of the image of the push button 31B when the drop) is not executed can be made common, and the deterioration of the game interest can be prevented.

In this embodiment, when the movable accessory 400 is not moved (dropped) as a post-operation effect based on the operation of the push button 31B, the push button 31B in the protruding state is operated and the push button 31B in the non-protruding state is operated. Although the embodiment in which the image of the push button 31B is erased from the effect display device 5 at the same timing as when the push button 31B is operated has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation of the push button 31B is not limited to this. When the movable accessory 400 is not moved (falled) as a post-operation effect based on the above, the timing differs depending on whether the push button 31B in the protruding state is operated and the push button 31B in the non-protruding state is operated. The image of the push button 31B may be deleted from the effect display device 5 with.

In addition, the push button 31B is projected in the fluctuation display of the super reach (when the execution of the change from the non-protruding state to the protruding state of the push button 31B is determined in S278 of the effect symbol fluctuation start processing), and the fluctuation display result is a big hit. In this case, as shown in FIG. 16B, based on the operation of the push button 31B, the image of the push button 31B is erased based on the elapse of the period L3 after the operation of the push button 31B. When the push button 31B is projected in the fluctuation display of the super reach (when the execution of the change from the non-protruding state to the protruding state of the push button 31B is determined in S278 of the effect symbol fluctuation start processing), the fluctuation display result is out of alignment. As shown in FIG. 17B, based on the operation of the push button 31B, the period L2 (period L3> period L2) has elapsed since the push button 31B was operated. The image is erased, that is, even if the push button 31B changes to the protruding state, the movement (fall) of the movable accessory 400 is executed or not executed based on the operation of the push button 31B. Since the mode for ending the display of the image of the push button 31B is different, the game entertainment can be improved.

In addition, the push button 31B is not projected in the fluctuation display of the super reach (when it is determined in S278 of the effect symbol fluctuation start processing that the change from the non-protruding state to the protruding state of the push button 31B is not executed), the variation display result is a big hit. In this case, as shown in FIG. 16A, the image of the non-protruding push button 31B, which is the post-operation image, is erased from the effect display device 5 for the period L2 after the push button 31B is operated. , The push button 31B is projected in the fluctuation display of the super reach (when the execution of the change from the non-protruding state to the protruding state of the push button 31B is determined in S278 of the effect symbol fluctuation start processing), and the fluctuation display result becomes a big hit. In this case, as shown in FIG. 16B, the image of the protruding push button 31B is displayed on the non-protruding push button 31B over the period L3 (period L3> period L2) after the push button 31B is operated. The image of the non-protruding push button 31B, which is the image after the operation, is deleted from the effect display device 5, that is, the display mode of the push button 31B displayed on the effect display device 5 is changed. Correspondingly, the period from the operation of the push button 31B to the end of the display of the image of the push button 31B is different, so that the game entertainment can be improved. In particular, the period L3 is a period longer than the period L2, and the image of the push button 31B in the protruding state can be updated to the image of the push button 31B in the non-protruding state during the period L3, so that the push button 31B It is possible to draw the player's attention to the update of the image of, and improve the game interest. Further, by updating the image of the push button 31B in the protruding state to the image of the push button 31B in the non-protruding state during the period L3, the image of the push button 31B is updated in response to the movement (fall) of the movable accessory 400. Since it becomes easier for the player to recognize what has been done, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the image of the push button 31B displayed as the operation promotion image in the variable display of the super reach is an image showing the push button 31B in the non-protruding state and an image showing the push button 31B in the protruding state. As a promotion image, an image of the push button 31B suitable for the mode (protruding state or non-protruding state) of the push button 31B can be displayed on the effect display device 5.

Further, in the case where the execution of the protrusion of the push button 31B is determined and the case where the non-execution of the protrusion of the push button 31B is determined, FIGS. 16 (A), 16 (B), 17 (A), and 17 (FIG. 17) As shown in B), since the display of the image of the push button 31B in the protruding state or the image of the push button 31B in the non-protruding state is started as the operation promotion image from the same timing (the timing when the period L1 has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation). Since it becomes easier for the player to recognize the timing at which the image of the push button 31B in the protruding state and the image of the push button 31B in the non-protruding state are started to be displayed, the entertainment of the game can be improved. In this embodiment, the first operation promotion display in the present invention is an image of the push button 31B in the non-protruding state, and the second operation promotion display is an image of the push button 31B in the protruding state. The image of the above and the image of the push button 31B in the protruding state are displayed on the effect display device 5 as an operation promotion image from the same timing (the timing when the period L1 elapses from the start of fluctuation). Not limited to this, the image of the push button 31B in the non-protruding state and the image of the push button 31B in the protruding state may be displayed on the effect display device 5 as an operation promotion image from different timings. That is, the first operation promotion display and the second operation promotion display may be displayed at different timings when the push button 31B is in the non-protruding state, and are different when the push button 31B is in the protruding state. It may be displayed at the timing.

Further, when the movable accessory 400 moves (falls) from the retracted position to the effect position in the post-operation effect, the image of the push button 31B displayed on the effect display device 5 is updated and maintained, while being movable. When the accessory 400 is arranged at the effect position, the first movable portion 401 and the second movable portion 402 are separated from each other from the state in which the first movable portion 401 and the second movable portion 402 are arranged close to each other in the substantially central portion in the left-right width direction of the movable accessory 400. When the movable accessory 400 is changed from the close state to the separated state by moving the movable accessory 400 in this way, an effect image different from the image of the push button 31B is displayed on the effect display device 5, so that the effect after operation is preferably produced. Can be executed.

Further, since the post-operation effect is executed based on the operation of the push button 31B by the player, it is possible to improve the game interest.

Further, the image of the push button 31B in the protruding state displayed on the effect display device 5 as an operation promotion image is linked to the movement (fall) of the movable accessory 400 from the retracted position to the effect position, and after the operation. Since the image is updated to the image of the push button 31B in the non-protruding state, the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, when the movable accessory 400 moves (falls) from the retracted position to the effect position in the post-operation effect, the image of the protruding push button 31B is the non-protruding push button 31B as the post-operation image. Since it is continuously displayed while being updated to the image, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

In this embodiment, the image of the push button 31B, which is a predetermined image in the present invention, is erased from the effect display device 5 at a timing before the movable accessory 400 starts to change from the close state to the separated state at the effect position. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image of the push button 31B is erased from the effect display device 5 at the start timing when the movable accessory 400 changes from the close state to the separated state at the effect position. You may. By doing so, the effect image is displayed on the effect display device 5 in place of the image of the push button 31B in response to the change from the close state to the separated state of the movable accessory 400, so that the effect after the operation is produced. The effect can be enhanced.

Further, as shown in FIG. 16B, when the push button 31B is operated by the player during the reach effect, an operation promotion message as an auxiliary image in the present invention is transmitted at the timing when the push button 31B is operated. The image of the push button 31B, which is erased from the effect display device 5 and is an image after the operation, is displayed at the timing when the movable accessory 400 has been dropped (the timing when the period L3 has elapsed since the push button 31B was operated). Since it is erased from the device 5, it is possible for the player to easily grasp that the operation of the push button 31B is recognized by the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the effect control CPU 120) while improving the game interest.

Although examples of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and any changes or additions within the scope of the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. Is done.

For example, in the above embodiment, as a post-operation effect, the movable accessory 400 is moved (falls) from the retracted position to the effect position based on the fact that the protruding push button 31B is operated by the player, and the effect display device. By updating the image of the push button 31B in the protruding state displayed in 5 to the image of the push button 31B in the non-protruding state, it is as if the movable accessory 400 is operating the image of the push button 31B. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 1 as shown in FIGS. 20 (A) to 20 (C), the movable accessory 400 is retracted in the post-operation effect. Instead of moving (falling) from the position to the effect position, the effect display device 5 may display an action effect in which a predetermined character image acts on the image of the push button 31B in the protruding state. By doing so, the image of the push button 31B in the protruding state is updated to the image of the push button 31B in the non-protruding state in response to the action effect, so that the player is paid attention to the action effect and the game is enjoyed. Can be improved.

In the present modification 1, the mode in which the mode of the image of the push button 31B is changed in response to the action effect is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the mode of the image of the push button 31B is used. The corresponding effect may be an effect other than the action effect.

Further, in the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the timing at which the display of the image of the push button 31B in the protruding state is started and the display of the image of the push button 31B in the non-protruding state are started on the effect display device 5. Although the mode in which the timing is the same (the timing when the period L1 has elapsed from the start of fluctuation) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 2, the push button 31B in the protruding state The timing of starting the display of the image and the timing of starting the display of the image of the non-protruding push button 31B may be different.

When the timing of starting the display of the image of the push button 31B in the protruding state and the timing of starting the display of the image of the push button 31B in the non-protruding state are different, the image of the push button 31B in the protruding state is displayed. An aspect of erasing the image of the push button 31B in the protruding state based on the operation of the push button 31B while being displayed, and a push button when the image of the push button 31B in the non-protruding state is displayed. The mode of erasing the image of the non-protruding push button 31B based on the operation of the 31B may be different from the mode in which the game entertainment may be improved.

Further, when the image of the push button 31B in the protruding state is displayed as the operation promotion image during the reach effect of the above embodiment, it varies more than when the image of the push button 31B in the non-protruding state is displayed as the operation promotion image. Although the embodiment in which the display result is a big hit is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and after displaying the image of the non-protruding push button 31B on the effect display device 5, the non-protruding state is displayed. A case may be provided in which the image of the push button 31B in the state changes to the image of the push button 31B in the protruding state. Further, when the image of the non-protruding push button 31B changes to the image of the non-protruding push button 31B, the image of the specific character acts on the image of the non-protruding push button 31B. Is executed, and after the action effect is executed, the image of the push button 31B in the protruding state is changed to the image of the push button 31B in the protruding state. , You may improve the game entertainment.

Further, in the above embodiment, the image corresponding to the first operating body in the present invention is used as the image of the push button 31B in the non-protruding state, and the image corresponding to the second operating body in the present invention is used as the image of the push button 31B in the protruding state. An example is illustrated in which the image of the push button 31B in the protruding state is changed to the image of the push button 31B in the non-protruding state in response to the movement (fall) from the retracted position of the object 400 to the effect position, but the present invention is limited to this. The image corresponding to the first operation body and the image corresponding to the second operation body in the present invention may be images having different colors and sizes as long as they are displayed in different modes. ..

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 is illustrated as an example of the game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a game ball having a predetermined number of balls is inside the game machine. The number of rented balls lent out in response to the player's request for rent and the number of prize balls given in response to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed gaming machine that is stored in the game. In these enclosed game machines, points and points are given to the player instead of the game ball, and the points and points given are given to the game value.

Further, in the above embodiment, in order to notify the effect control CPU 120 of the variation pattern indicating the variation mode such as the variation time and the type of reach effect, one variation pattern designation command is transmitted when the variation is started. As shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control CPU 120 by two or more commands. Specifically, when notifying by two commands, the CPU 103 uses the first command to, for example, set the fluctuation time and the fluctuation mode before reaching the reach (or before the so-called second stop if the command does not reach). The command to be shown is sent, and the second command shows the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode after reaching the reach (after the so-called second stop if the reach is not reached), such as the type of reach and the presence or absence of the re-lottery effect. A command may be transmitted, or only the fluctuation time is notified by the first command and the second command, and the effect control CPU 120 is used for the specific fluctuation mode executed at each timing. You may make a selection with. When sending two commands, the two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the first command is sent (for example, the next timer interrupt). In), the second command may be sent. By notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands in this way, it is possible to reduce the amount of data that must be stored as the fluctuation pattern specification command.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which a game ball is launched from below the game area by a ball launching device has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the ball launching device is used as a pachinko gaming machine 1. By providing the game ball at a position above the game area in the above, the game ball may be launched from a position above the game area.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which only a jackpot that can acquire many game balls is generated by opening the jackpot in the jackpot game is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the probability variation jackpot B is suddenly caused by the occurrence of the probability variation jackpot B by significantly shortening the opening time of the jackpot in the round game so that the player does not recognize that the jackpot has been opened. It may be a sudden jackpot that makes it look like it is in a probable state. When these probabilistic jackpots B are used as sudden jackpots, a small hit that opens the jackpot with the same opening pattern as the opening pattern of the jackpot in the jackpot game of the probabilistic jackpot B is provided. It is also possible to generate a state (so-called latent state) in which it is unknown whether the gaming state after the occurrence of the probability variation big hit B or the small hit is the high probability state or the low probability state.

Further, in the above embodiment, the embodiment in which the starting winning opening is set to two, the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the starting winning opening is not limited thereto. May be only one, or the starting winning opening may be three or more.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the form in which the special symbol is set to two, the first special symbol and the second special symbol, is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only one special symbol is used. Or, the number of special symbols may be 3 or more.

Further, in the above embodiment, the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B each changely display a plurality of types of special symbols including the final stop symbol that is the display result, and then stop and display the final stop symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed after a plurality of types of special symbols are variablely displayed without including the final stop symbol that is the display result. It may be. That is, the final stop symbol that is the display result may be a symbol different from the special symbol used for the variable display.

The advantageous state for the player is a specific game state (big hit, etc.) that is advantageous for the player who can acquire many game media, and a plurality of types of specific game states in which the expected value of the game medium that can be acquired is different ( A high-probability game state (high-probability state) with a high probability of becoming the specific game state, or a high-base state (time saving state) in which the conditions for paying out prize balls are more likely to be satisfied than in a normal game state (such as a big hit with a different number of rounds). ), High probability and low base state (latent probability change state), special reach state (for example, super reach, etc.), and a state in which the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern based on the jackpot fluctuation pattern.

Further, in the above embodiment, the pachinko game machine is applied as an example of the game machine, but the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using, for example, the game value. At the same time, one game is completed by deriving the variable display result to the effect display device capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified by each, and a prize is awarded according to the variable display result derived to the effect display device. It is also applicable to slot machines where is possible.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1), which can be operated with an operating body (for example, a push button 31B) that can be operated by a player. A movable body (for example, a movable accessory 400) and an action effect executing means (for example, an effect) capable of executing an operation effect (for example, a post-operation effect) for operating the movable body based on the operation of the operation body. The operation is described as an image (for example, an operation promotion image) for prompting the operation of the operating body when the control CPU 120 executes the post-operation effect execution process shown in FIG. 15 and the operation effect. A display means (for example, an effect display device 5) capable of displaying an image corresponding to an operating body corresponding to the body (for example, an image of a push button 31B) is provided, and the display mode of the image corresponding to the operating body is the movable body. The image of the push button 31B in the protruding state is non-protruding in response to the movement (fall) of the movable accessory 400 from the retracted position to the effect position (as shown in FIG. 19), which can be changed according to the operation. A portion updated to the image of the push button 31B in the state), and an item display means for displaying a plurality of items corresponding to a plurality of types of effects that can be selected by the player (for example, as shown in FIG. 47, a plurality of types). A microcomputer 90200 for effect control that displays items corresponding to the music of the above, and a selection effect means (as shown in FIG. 47) capable of executing a selection effect for selecting one of the plurality of items. An effect control microcomputer 90200 or the like that changes an item selected by operation, and a corresponding effect execution means (selected as shown in FIG. 47) that can execute an effect corresponding to the item selected by the selected effect means. The item display means is provided with a microcomputer 90200 for effect control that outputs music and images corresponding to the above items), and the item display means executes the first effect of the plurality of types of effects in the selected effect. It is possible to display the item corresponding to the first effect even in the state of being in the state (for example, as shown in FIG. 47 (e)), even in the state where the item corresponding to the music A is executed. The item corresponding to A can be displayed by "returning", etc.), and the corresponding effect executing means is an item corresponding to a second effect different from the first effect while the first effect is being executed. When is selected, the second effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 47 (h), it is easy when an item corresponding to music B different from music A is selected. When the item corresponding to the first effect is selected again while the first effect is being executed (such as playing the song B from the beginning), the state of the first effect being executed is displayed. A game machine to be taken over and executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 47 (g), when the item corresponding to the music A is selected again, the music A is played as it is).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by corresponding to the movement of the movable body and the change in the display mode of the image corresponding to the operating body. In addition, even when the selected effect is selected again, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

Alternatively, the gaming machine of the present invention also includes a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) and an operating body (for example, a push button 31B) that can be operated by a player. A predetermined effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the action effect) capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, the action effect shown in FIG. 20) based on the operation of the operating body, and A display means (for example, an effect) capable of displaying an image corresponding to the operation body (for example, an image of the push button 31B) corresponding to the operation body as an image for prompting the operation of the operation body when executing the predetermined effect. With the display device 5), the display mode of the image corresponding to the operating body can be changed in response to the predetermined effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 20, a push in a protruding state corresponding to the action effect. An item display means (for example, FIG. 47) that displays a plurality of items corresponding to a plurality of types of effects that can be selected by the player, and a portion in which the image of the button 31B is updated to the image of the push button 31B in the non-protruding state. As shown in (Fig.), An effect control microcomputer 90200 or the like that displays items corresponding to a plurality of types of music, and a selection effect means (FIG.) capable of executing a selection effect that selects one of the plurality of items. As shown in FIG. 47, an effect control microcomputer 90200 or the like that changes an item selected by a selection operation, and a corresponding effect executing means (FIG. 47) that can execute an effect corresponding to the item selected by the selected effect means. As shown in the above, the item display means is provided with a production control microcomputer 90200 or the like that outputs music or video corresponding to the selected item), and the item display means is among the plurality of types of production in the selection production. The item corresponding to the first effect can be displayed even when the first effect of the above is being executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 47 (e), the item corresponding to the music A is executed. The item corresponding to the music A can be displayed by "returning" even in the present state), and the corresponding effect executing means is different from the first effect in the state where the first effect is executed. When the item corresponding to the second effect is selected, the second effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 47 (h), the item corresponding to the song B different from the song A is selected. In this case, the music B is played from the beginning, etc.), and when the item corresponding to the first effect is selected again in the state where the first effect is executed, it is executed. The state of the first effect is inherited and executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 47 (g), when the item corresponding to the music A is selected again, the music A is played as it is). Be done.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by corresponding to the predetermined effect and the change in the display mode of the motion-corresponding image. In addition, even when the selected effect is selected again, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

It should be noted that the image corresponding to the operating body (for example, the image of the push button 31B) displayed as an image for encouraging the operation of the operating body, and a plurality of types of effects that the player can select are supported. When displaying a plurality of items (for example, items corresponding to a plurality of types of music) on the same display device (for example, effect display devices 5, 909), it is possible to display an image corresponding to the operating body corresponding to the operating body. The display means is to display a plurality of items corresponding to a plurality of types of effects that can be selected by the player, and a predetermined effect (for example, a predetermined effect) that can be executed based on the operation of the operating body. , The action effect shown in FIG. 20) is executed in the item display means for displaying a plurality of items corresponding to a plurality of types of effects that can be selected by the player. That is, the item display means for displaying a plurality of items corresponding to a plurality of types of effects that can be selected by the player is a display means capable of displaying an image corresponding to the operating body corresponding to the operating body, or a predetermined image in a predetermined effect. It will be included in the display means capable of displaying and displaying the image corresponding to the operating body corresponding to the operating body.

Further, it is possible to improve the game interest by responding to the predetermined effect and the change in the display mode of the motion-corresponding image, and it is possible to prevent the game enjoyment from being lowered even when the selected effect is selected again. As an example of the form of the game machine, it is a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 901, etc.) that plays a game, and is an item display means (for example,) that displays a plurality of items corresponding to a plurality of types of effects that can be selected by the player. , A production control microcomputer 90200 or the like that displays items corresponding to a plurality of types of music, and a selection effect that can execute a selection effect for selecting one of the plurality of items, as shown in FIG. 47. Means (as shown in FIG. 47, an effect control microcomputer 90200 or the like that changes an item selected by a selection operation) and a corresponding effect execution means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the item selected by the selected effect means. (As shown in FIG. 47, the effect control microcomputer 90200 or the like that outputs music or video corresponding to the selected item), and the item display means includes the plurality of types in the selected effect. Even when the first effect of the effects is being executed, the items corresponding to the first effect can be displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 47 (e), the items corresponding to the music A are displayed. Even if it is being executed, the item corresponding to the music A can be displayed by "returning", etc.), and the corresponding effect executing means is the first effect while the first effect is being executed. When an item corresponding to the second effect different from that of the second effect is selected, the second effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 47 (h), the item corresponding to the song B different from the song A is displayed. (When selected, the music B is played from the beginning, etc.), and when the item corresponding to the first effect is selected again while the first effect is being executed, the execution is performed. An example is a gaming machine that takes over and executes the state of the first effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 47 (g), when the item corresponding to the music A is selected again, the music A is played as it is). Hereinafter, an example of the form example of this game machine will be described as another form example.

(Example of other forms)
Hereinafter, other form examples will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 901, which is an example of the gaming machine, will be described. FIG. 21 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine (ball game machine) 901 as viewed from the front. Although the pachinko gaming machine is shown here as an example of the gaming machine, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine, and may be, for example, an image-type gaming machine, a coin gaming machine, or the like.

The pachinko gaming machine 901 is composed of an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame that is openably and closably attached to the inside of the outer frame. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 901 has a glass door frame 902 formed in a frame shape provided on the gaming frame so as to be openable and closable. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanical parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (game described later). It is a structure including a board 906).

As shown in FIG. 21, the pachinko gaming machine 901 has a glass door frame 902 formed in a frame shape. On the lower surface of the glass door frame 902, there is a ball hitting plate (upper plate) 903. At the lower part of the hitting ball supply plate 903, a surplus ball receiving plate 904 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply plate 903 and a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 905 for firing the hitting ball are provided. A game board 906 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 902. The game board 906 is a structure including a plate-shaped body constituting the game board 906 and various parts attached to the plate-shaped body. Further, on the front surface of the game board 906, a game area 907 is formed in which the driven game ball can flow down.

An effect display device 909 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 907. On the display screen of the effect display device 909, a plurality of types that can be identified based on the establishment of the first start condition, which is the first execution condition (for example, the hit ball has won the first start winning opening 9013). A display area (hereinafter referred to as a first variable display unit 909a) for variably displaying (hereinafter, also referred to as variable display or variable) a decorative symbol for directing (first decorative symbol) and deriving and displaying a display result, and a second Multiple types of decorative symbols (second decorative symbols) that can be identified are variable based on the establishment of the second starting condition, which is the execution condition (for example, the hit ball has won the second starting winning opening 9014). It is easier for the player to visually recognize the displayed contents than the display area (hereinafter referred to as the second variable display unit 909b) for displaying and deriving the display result, and the first variable display unit 909a and the second variable display unit 909b. There is a display area (hereinafter, referred to as an effect symbol display unit 909c). It should be noted that the fact that the display contents are easy to visually recognize means that, for example, the size of the display area is large, or the display contents in the first variable display unit 909a and the second variable display unit 909b are always monochromatic. The display color may change. Further, in this embodiment, the effect symbol display unit 909c is controlled to display identification information (hereinafter, also referred to as an effect symbol) in three display areas of left, middle, and right. It should be noted that the winning is that the game ball enters the area defined in advance as the winning area such as the winning opening. Further, to derive and display the display result is to stop and display the symbol. In this embodiment, one effect symbol display unit 909c is provided for two variable display units (first variable display unit 909a and second variable display unit 909b), and the effect symbol display unit 909c has two variable displays. Since the effect corresponding to any of the decorative symbols (first decorative symbol and second decorative symbol) that are variably displayed on the display unit is executed, whether or not the decorative symbol status (for example, the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed) is executed. ) Is difficult to grasp.

A first special symbol display (special symbol display device) 908a and a second special symbol display 908b for variably displaying a special symbol as identification information are provided on the upper part of the effect display device 909. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b are realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9, respectively. Has been done. The first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b use more types of numbers such as 0 to 99 in order to make it difficult to grasp whether the stop symbol is a probabilistic symbol or a non-probable variable symbol. It may be configured to be variable display. Hereinafter, the identification information variably displayed on the first special symbol display 908a may be referred to as the first special symbol, and the identification information variably displayed on the second special symbol display 908b may be referred to as the second special symbol. Further, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both numbers 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Also, some may be different. As an example, the type of the first special symbol includes numbers 0 to 5 and non-numeric characters, and the type of the second special symbol is the numbers 0 to 5 and non-numeric characters and the first special symbol. It may include a character different from the character of.

In the vicinity of the first special symbol display 908a, the number of valid winning balls that have entered the first starting winning opening 9013, that is, the number of first reserved storage (holding memory is also referred to as starting storage or starting winning memory) is displayed. A first special symbol hold storage display 9018a including four displays is provided. The first special symbol hold storage display 9018a increases the number of lit indicators by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 908a is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one. Further, in the vicinity of the second special symbol display 908b, there is a second special symbol hold storage display 9018b composed of four indicators for displaying the number of effective winning balls entered in the second start winning opening 9014, that is, the number of hold storages. It is provided. The second special symbol hold storage display 9018b increases the number of lit indicators by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 908b is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one.

The first variable display unit 909a performs variable display of the decorative symbol as a decorative (directing) symbol during the variable display time of the special symbol by the first special symbol display 908a. Further, the second variable display unit 909b performs variable display of the decorative symbol as a decorative symbol during the variable display time of the special symbol by the second special symbol display 908b. Here, in this embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display 908a and the variable display of the special symbol by the second special symbol display 908b can be variably displayed at the same time.

The first variable display unit 909a and the second variable display unit 909b that perform variable display of the decorative design are controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. Hereinafter, the identification information variably displayed on the first variable display unit 909a may be referred to as a first decorative symbol, and the identification information variably displayed on the second variable display unit 909b may be referred to as a second decorative symbol. Further, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be collectively referred to as a decorative symbol. The type of the first decorative symbol and the type of the second decorative symbol may be the same (for example, both numbers 0 to 9), or the types may be different. If the types are different, some may be different. As an example, the type of the first decorative symbol includes numbers 0 to 5 and non-numeric characters, and the type of the second decorative symbol is the numbers 0 to 5 and non-numeric characters and the first decorative symbol. It may include a character different from the character of.

On the display screen of the effect display device 909, the number of valid winning balls in the first starting winning opening 9013, that is, the number of first reserved balls, and the number of valid winning balls in the second starting winning opening 9014, that is, the number of second reserved storages. There is an area (hereinafter, referred to as a symbol hold storage display unit 9018c) for displaying the total number (total hold storage number) which is the total of and. As described above, in this embodiment, the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is displayed on the symbol reserved storage display unit 9018c, which is relatively easy for the player to see, so that the player can see it. It is difficult to grasp each of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number. In this embodiment, the first special symbol holding storage display 9018a and the second special symbol holding storage display 9018b are four indicators such as lamps and LEDs, which are smaller than the symbol holding storage display unit 9018c, respectively. Although it is configured, an indicator of another aspect may be used in order to make it more difficult to grasp the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number. As an example, the first special symbol hold storage display 9018a and the second special symbol hold storage display 9018b are each composed of one display, and the display color is different or the display density is different according to the number of hold storages. Let me do it.

In this embodiment, the upper limit of the total number of pending storages that can be displayed, that is, the total number of reserved storages is 8. The symbol hold storage display unit 9018c increases the number of lighting display areas by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display of the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b is started, the number of lighting display areas is reduced by one. Alternatively, among the eight display areas in the symbol hold storage display unit 9018c, the number of areas displayed in a color predetermined as a valid start prize is increased by one. Then, each time the variable display of the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b is started, the number of areas displayed in the colors determined in advance as the effective start prize is reduced by one.

Further, in this embodiment, the upper limit value of the first reserved storage number is set to 4, and the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number is set to 4. Therefore, when the game ball wins the first start winning opening 9013 when the first reserved memory number is 4, the winning becomes an invalid starting winning that does not satisfy the first starting condition. When the game ball wins in the first start winning opening 9013 when the first reserved memory number is less than 4, the winning becomes the effective starting winning (first effective starting winning) that satisfies the first starting condition. Similarly, when the game ball wins the second start winning opening 9014 when the second reserved memory number is 4, the winning becomes an invalid starting winning that does not satisfy the second starting condition. When the game ball wins in the second start winning opening 9014 when the second reserved memory number is less than 4, the winning becomes an effective starting winning (second valid starting winning) that satisfies the second starting condition. In this example, the upper limit of the first reserved storage number is set to 4, the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number is set to 4, and the upper limit value of the total reserved storage number is set to 8, but these values are examples. .. Further, the upper limit value may be changed according to the gaming state.

Below the effect display device 909, a winning device having a first starting winning opening 9013 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 9013 is guided to the back surface of the game board 906 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 9013a. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 9013a, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

A gate 9032 is provided on the right side of the effect display device 909. The game ball that has passed through the gate 9032 is detected by the gate switch 9032a. Further, an operation gate 9017 is provided below the gate 9032. The game ball that has passed through the actuating gate 9017 is detected by the actuating gate switch 9017a.

Here, in this embodiment, the big hit game is not started as soon as the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as the variation display result of the first special symbol, but the game ball passes through the operating gate 9017 and the operating gate switch. It is configured to shift to the jackpot game on condition that it is detected by 9017a. Therefore, when the player takes a break from the game after the end of the big hit game state, it is possible to limit the control to the big hit game state from progressing during the break of the player. In particular, in this embodiment, as will be described later, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is as long as 15 minutes or 5 minutes, so that the player can perform the variation display of the second special symbol during the long-time variation display. You may take a break. Even in such a case, even if the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a big hit, it is possible to limit the progress of the big hit game during the break, and the profit of the player is impaired. Can be prevented. In this embodiment, the case where the operating gate 9017 is provided separately from the gate 9032 is shown, but the gate 9032 and the operating gate 9017 may be configured as a common gate. Further, it is not always necessary to provide the operation gate 9017, and when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, the game may be configured to shift to the big hit game as it is after the symbol confirmation display time elapses.

Below the operating gate 9017, a special variable winning ball device 9020 forming a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 9020 is provided with an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 908b. In the advantageous state (big hit game state) that occurs when is derived and displayed, the opening / closing plate is controlled to the open state by the solenoid 9021, so that the big winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened. The game ball that has won the grand prize opening is detected by the first count switch 9023a. When a game ball is detected by the first count switch 9023a, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Below the special variable winning ball device 9020, a special variable winning ball device 9022 forming a special winning opening 9024 for small hits and a variable winning ball device 9015 having a second starting winning opening 9014 are provided. As shown in FIG. 21, the special variable winning ball device 9022 is arranged on the left side, and the variable winning ball device 9015 is arranged adjacent to the right side thereof. Although the details will be described later, these special variable winning ball devices 9022 and the variable winning ball device 9015 extend in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and have a plate-shaped bottom surface formed as the bottom surface of the flow path through which the game ball flows down. By moving the member forward and backward, the game ball wins in the open state (also called the open state) where the game ball can win in the special winning opening 9024 and the second starting winning opening 9014 located below the bottom member. Change to an impossible closed state (also called a closed state). The special variable winning ball device 9022 moves the bottom member forward toward the front in the small hit game state that occurs when a predetermined display result (small hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b. The bottom member is moved backward from the closed state, and the opening control is executed so that the special winning opening 9024, which is the winning area, is opened. Further, the variable winning ball device 9015 moves the bottom member backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward toward the front when the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 9010. The opening control for opening the second starting winning opening 9014, which is the winning area, is executed.

In this embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 9022 and the variable winning ball device 9015 are formed so as to have the same structure, but as shown in FIG. 21, the variable winning ball device 9015 The special variable winning ball device 9022 is slightly larger than the special variable winning ball device 9022. Further, as shown in FIG. 21, since the special variable winning ball device 9022 and the variable winning ball device 9015 are arranged so as to be adjacent to each other, the game area 907 was dropped without winning the special variable winning ball device 9020. The game ball first falls on the variable winning ball device 9015. At this time, if the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 9015 is moved backward and the second starting winning opening 9014 is in the open state, The game ball wins in the second start winning opening 9014, and the game ball does not flow toward the special variable winning ball device 9022. On the other hand, if the second starting winning opening 9014 is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 9015 and is guided toward the special variable winning ball device 9022. At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 9022 is moved backward and the special winning opening 9024 is in the open state, the game ball wins the special winning opening 9024. Further, if the special winning opening 9024 is not in the open state, the game ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device 9022 and falls toward the out opening 9026 as it is.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21, the special variable winning ball device 9022 is arranged on the left side and the variable winning ball device 9015 is arranged on the right side, but the special variable winning ball device 9022 and The bottom member of the variable winning ball device 9015 is formed so as to gently incline from the upper right to the lower left, and when the bottom member is not retracted and is in the closed state, the variable winning ball device 9015 is used for a special variable winning. Since the game ball is configured to flow toward the ball device 9022, in this sense, the variable winning ball device 9015 is provided on the upstream side, and the special variable winning ball device 9022 is on the downstream side. It can be said that it is provided.

A switch (second count switch 9025a, see FIG. 25) capable of detecting a winning game ball in the special winning opening 9024 is provided in the special winning opening 9024. When a game ball is detected by the second count switch 9025a, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information. Here, when the game ball passes (enters) the special winning opening 9024 opened in the special variable winning ball device 9022, the number of winning balls is smaller than that when the game ball wins the large winning opening. For example, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball passes (enters) through other prize openings such as the first start winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9014. Therefore, if the special variable winning ball device 9022 is open-controlled and the special winning opening 9024 is opened, it is in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 9022 is controlled to be closed and the special winning opening 9024 is closed, the game ball cannot be passed (entered) through the special winning opening 9024 to obtain the winning ball. It will be a disadvantage for the person.

Further, in the second start winning opening 9014, a second starting opening switch 9014a capable of detecting a winning game ball in the second starting winning opening 9014 is provided. When a game ball is detected by the second start port switch 9014a, a predetermined number (1 piece) of game balls are paid out as prize balls based on this detection information.

Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9014 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

In this embodiment, the gate 9032, the operating gate 9017, the special variable winning ball device 9020 (large winning opening), the variable winning ball device 9015 (second starting winning opening 9014), and the special variable winning ball device 9022 (special). Since the winning opening 9024) is provided on the right side of the game area 907, the player aims at the right side of the game area 907 and launches the game (so-called right side) during a big hit game or in the KT state described later. Perform the striking operation). Therefore, although detailed description is omitted in this embodiment, when the jackpot game or the KT state is in progress, for example, the effect display device 909 displays "right-handed" or the like or moves to the right. It is desirable to configure so as to notify that the right-handed operation period is in progress by displaying an arrow indicating.

Below the effect display device 909, a normal symbol display 9010 for variably displaying a normal symbol is provided. In this embodiment, the ordinary symbol display 9010 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the ordinary symbol display 9010 is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. Further, the small display is formed in a square shape, for example. The ordinary symbol display 9010 may be configured to variably display a number (or a two-digit symbol) from 00 to 99, for example. Further, the ordinary symbol display 9010 is not limited to a 7-segment LED or the like, for example, a display capable of lighting and displaying a predetermined symbol display (for example, a decorative lamp capable of alternately lighting and displaying "○" and "×"). It may be composed of.

When the game ball passes through the gate 9032 and is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the variable display of the display of the normal symbol display 9010 is started. Then, when the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 9010 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol, for example, symbol “7”), the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened for a predetermined time. That is, the state of the variable winning ball device 9015 is a state in which the player is advantageous from a disadvantageous state to an advantageous state (a state in which the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening 9014) when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol. Changes to. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 9010, a normal symbol hold storage display 9041 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 9032 is provided. Every time the game ball passes through the gate 9032, that is, every time the game ball is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the normal symbol hold storage display 9041 increases the number of lit LEDs by one. Then, each time the variable display of the normal symbol display 9010 is started, the number of lit LEDs is reduced by one.

Decorative lamps 9025 that blink during the game are provided around the left and right sides of the game area 907 of the game board 906, and an out port 9026 that captures a hit ball that has not won a prize is provided at the lower part. Further, two speakers 9027 for producing sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the upper left and right outside the game area 907. Top frame lamps 9028a, left frame lamps 9028b, and right frame lamps 9028c provided on the front frame are provided on the upper outer circumference, the left outer circumference, and the right outer circumference of the game area 907. Further, a prize ball lamp 9051 that lights up when there is a remaining number of prize balls is provided near the left frame lamp 9028b, and a ball burnout lamp 9052 that lights up when the supply ball runs out is provided near the right frame lamp 9028c. It is provided.

The game machine is a ball launching device (not shown) that drives a drive motor in response to the player operating the ball striking handle 905 and launches the game ball into the game area 907 by using the rotational force of the drive motor. ) Is provided. When the player continuously operates the hitting ball operation handle 905, the game ball is launched every 0.6 seconds. The game ball launched from the hit ball launcher enters the game area 907 through a hit ball rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 907, and then descends from the game area 907. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 9013 and is detected by the first start opening switch 9013a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the jackpot game ends or the previous variable display ends). Then, the first start condition is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 908a, and the first decorative symbol is variable on the first variable display unit 909a. The display starts. That is, the first special symbol corresponds to the winning of the first starting winning opening 9013. Unless the variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the total number of reserved storages (total number) displayed on the symbol holding storage display unit 9018c, provided that the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value. Is increased by 1.

Further, when the game ball enters the second start winning opening 9014 and is detected by the second start opening switch 9014a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the jackpot game ends or the previous variable display). The second special symbol display 908b starts variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the second variable display unit 909b starts the second decorative symbol. Variable display of is started. That is, the second special symbol corresponds to the winning of the second starting winning opening 9014. Unless the variable display of the second special symbol can be started, the total number of reserved storages (total number) displayed on the symbol holding storage display unit 9018c, provided that the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit. Is increased by 1. However, even if the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, if the total reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the total number displayed on the symbol holding storage display unit 9018c is incremented by one.

The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a and the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first variable display unit 909a are stopped when a predetermined time elapses. When the first special symbol at the time of stopping becomes a jackpot symbol (specific display result), the game shifts to the jackpot game state. That is, the special variable winning ball device 9020 is opened until a certain time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses, or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls win a prize in the large winning opening. One round in the jackpot game state is from the time when the special variable winning ball device 9020 is opened until a certain period of time elapses, or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of hit balls wins the big winning opening. When a predetermined number of game balls win a prize in the large winning opening, or when a certain period of time has elapsed after the special variable winning ball device 9020 is opened, the continuation right is generated and the special variable winning ball device 9020 is opened again. The generation of the right to continue is allowed a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 rounds, 6 rounds, 16 rounds). In addition, a V winning area may be provided in the large winning opening, and the continuation right may be generated on condition that the hit ball wins in the V winning area while the special variable winning ball device 9020 is open. The number of rounds in the jackpot game state differs depending on the type of jackpot. In this embodiment, the types of jackpots are 2R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, and 16R probability variation jackpot. For example, if a 2R normal jackpot or a 2R probability variation jackpot occurs, a two-round jackpot game A state is given, and if a 6R normal jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, a 6-round jackpot gaming state is granted, and if a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, a 16-round jackpot gaming state is granted.

When it is decided that the stop symbol when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display 908a is a jackpot symbol with a probability variation (special display result: probability variation symbol, for example, "7"). Is a high probability that the next big hit is higher than the low probability state (there are low probability / non-KT state and low probability / first KT state described later) (high probability that big hit is more likely to occur than low probability state). It becomes an advantageous state for the player (state). When the stop symbol of the first special symbol is determined to be the probabilistic symbol and shifts to the probabilistic state, not only the probability that the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a becomes a jackpot symbol increases, but also The probability that the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 908b will be a big hit symbol is also high. That is, not only the jackpot determination based on the first start winning prize but also the jackpot determination based on the second starting winning prize is determined to be a jackpot with a higher probability than the low probability state.

Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 908b and the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second variable display unit 909b are stopped when a predetermined time elapses. When the second special symbol at the time of stopping becomes a jackpot symbol (specific display result), the game shifts to the jackpot game state.

When it is decided that the stop symbol when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped in the second special symbol display 908b is a jackpot symbol with a probability variation (special display result: probability variation symbol, for example, "7"). Is a high probability that the next big hit is higher than the low probability state (there are low probability / non-KT state and low probability / first KT state described later) (high probability that big hit is more likely to occur than low probability state). It becomes an advantageous state for the player (state). When the stop symbol of the second special symbol is determined to be the probabilistic symbol and shifts to the probabilistic state, not only the probability that the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 908b becomes a jackpot symbol increases, but also The probability that the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a will be a big hit symbol is also high. That is, not only in the determination of the big hit based on the second start winning prize, but also in the determination of the big hit based on the first starting winning prize, the big hit is determined with a higher probability than in the low probability state.

Further, when the second special symbol at the time of stopping becomes the small hit symbol, the state shifts to the small hit game state. That is, the special variable winning ball device 9022 is opened until a certain period of time has elapsed so that the game ball can be won in the special winning opening 9024. As a result, the small hit game state is also open so that the player can get a ball, although it is less than the big hit game state.

In the probabilistic state, as described above, the stop symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b are jackpot symbols (specific display result: for example. , 0 to 9) is higher than the low probability state.

Here, the gaming state in this embodiment will be described. First, the gaming state in this embodiment includes a normal state (low probability / non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. Further, there are two types of KT states, a first KT state and a second KT state. In this embodiment, the gaming state is set to a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state: normal state). When it is controlled, when it is controlled to the first KT state (low probability / first KT state) with low probability, and when it is controlled to the first KT state (high probability / first KT state) with high probability. , High probability and may be controlled to the second KT state (high probability / second KT state).

In the first KT state, as will be described later, a small hit is likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 9022 is likely to be in the open state, but the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015 on the upstream side is extremely long, and the small hit Even if this occurs, there are very few cases where a game ball wins a prize in the special variable winning ball device 9022 on the downstream side (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuations). Further, in the second KT state of the KT state, as will be described later, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015 on the upstream side is short, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is moved to the special variable winning ball device 9022 on the downstream side. Easy to win.

The probability change state is a gaming state in which a big hit is more likely to occur than the low probability state. Specifically, since the number of jackpot judgment values in the jackpot determination table in the probability variation state is 10 times the number of jackpot determination values in the jackpot determination table in the low probability state, the probability variation state is more likely to be a jackpot than in the low probability state. It is in a game state that is easy to play.

In addition, the KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state). Specifically, in this embodiment, the probability that the variable winning ball device 9015 will be in the open state will be the same as in the normal state even in the KT state, but when the second special symbol changes. Since the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation pattern is shorter in the KT state than in the normal state, the ratio of the number of fluctuations to a certain time is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. Further, since the second special symbol is configured to be a small hit in a part when the fluctuation is not a big hit, the KT state is set to a gaming state in which the small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. As a result, in the KT state, small hits are frequently generated by mainly changing the second special symbol, which is advantageous to the player.

Next, the transition of the gaming state in this embodiment will be described. First, in this embodiment, in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the player performs a game ball launch operation (left-handed) aiming at the left side of the game area 907. Therefore, in the normal state, the starting prize is mainly generated in the first starting winning opening 9013, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. When a big hit occurs in the normal state, the state shifts to the low probability / first KT state, the high probability / first KT state, or the high probability / second KT state. For example, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, the probability shifts to the low probability / first KT state, and then when the fluctuation display of 100 times is completed without the jackpot occurring, the first KT state is terminated and the normal state is entered. Further, for example, when a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, the probability shifts to the high probability / first KT state, and then the high probability / first KT state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. Further, for example, when a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, the probability shifts to the high probability / second KT state, and then the high probability / second KT state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs.

In this embodiment, a case is shown in which the first KT state is terminated when the fluctuation display of 100 times is uniformly terminated when the probability is controlled to the low probability / first KT state, but the present embodiment is limited to such an embodiment. Absent. For example, a plurality of jackpot types that trigger a low probability / first KT state are provided, and the number of fluctuation displays in which the first KT state continues after the jackpot game ends differs depending on the jackpot type (for example, 20 times). Or 30 times, 50 times, 100 times).

In this embodiment, when the player has transitioned to the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state), the player moves to the right of the game area 907. Aim and perform a game ball launch operation (right-handed). Therefore, in the KT state, the starting prize is mainly generated in the second starting winning opening 9014, and the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. When a big hit occurs in the KT state, it shifts to a low probability / first KT state, a high probability / first KT state, or a high probability / second KT state. For example, when a 2R normal jackpot occurs, the probability shifts to the low probability / first KT state, and after that, when the fluctuation display of 100 times is completed without the jackpot occurring, the first KT state is terminated and the normal state is entered. Further, for example, when a 2R probability variation jackpot or a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs, the state shifts to the high probability / first KT state, and then the high probability / first KT state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. Further, for example, when a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, the probability shifts to the high probability / second KT state, and then the high probability / second KT state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs.

However, as will be described later, if the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed and the 16R probability variation jackpot is obtained even though the jackpot was in the non-KT state before the start of the jackpot, the state shifts to the high probability state. However, it is controlled to shift to the first KT state instead of the second KT state. That is, even though it is in the normal state, it is hit right and a 16R probability variation big hit occurs due to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. In such a case, it shifts to the second KT state and a considerable number in the small hit game. If you can get the prize ball of, the original playability in the KT state will be impaired, so even if you hit right in the normal state by shifting only to the first KT state, the prize ball by the small hit game It is configured so that it is not possible to obtain much.

Specifically, in this embodiment, when a 16R probability variation jackpot is obtained based on the variation display of the second special symbol, the second KT state is entered only when the KT state is reached before the start of the jackpot. If it is in the non-KT state before the start of the big hit, it is configured to shift to the first KT state. That is, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), it is configured to perform a left-handed operation, and is mainly configured on the assumption that the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. However, if the variation display of the 2nd special symbol is configured to unconditionally shift to the 2nd KT state when a 16R probability variation jackpot occurs, the right-handed operation is intentionally performed even in the non-KT state. It becomes possible to shift to the 2KT state, which may impair the original playability and unnecessarily increase gambling. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the 16R probability variation jackpot is obtained based on the variation display of the second special symbol, the second KT state is shifted only when the KT state is before the start of the jackpot. In the non-KT state, the player is urged to perform a left-handed operation to prevent such a situation. If a right-handed player is hit in the non-KT state, a warning sound may be output to prompt the left-handed player.

Further, the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a and the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first variable display unit 909a are synchronized with each other. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 908b and the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second variable display unit 909b are synchronized with each other. Here, "synchronization" means that the start time and end time of the variable display are the same, and the period of the variable display is the same. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first variable display unit 909a. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second variable display unit 909b.

Further, when the probabilistic symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a, the decorative symbol (for example, "7") reminiscent of the probabilistic symbol is stopped and displayed on the first variable display unit 909a. When the probabilistic symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b, a special decorative symbol (for example, "7") reminiscent of the probabilistic symbol is stopped and displayed on the second variable display unit 909b.

Further, in the effect symbol display unit 909c, when the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 908a, the effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. For example, the effect symbols are variably displayed in the three display areas of the effect symbol display unit 909c. When performing the reach effect, for example, the left and right effect symbols are stopped and displayed during the variable display. Then, basically, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a, the stop symbol of the effect symbol is derived and displayed on the effect symbol display unit 909c (in the three display areas). The production design is finally stopped.). When the stop symbol of the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the stop symbol of the effect symbol is an effect symbol that reminds the player that the stop symbol of the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol (for example, left). (Three production patterns) with the middle and right aligned. Hereinafter, such a production symbol is also referred to as a jackpot symbol.

When the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display 908b, the effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. For example, the effect symbols are variably displayed in the three display areas of the effect symbol display unit 909c.

Further, when the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display 908b at the same time, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. The effect corresponding to any of the variable displays is executed.

When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed independently, the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol ends and the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped. When is derived and displayed, the variable display of the effect symbol ends, and the stop symbol of the effect symbol is derived and displayed. Further, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time, specifically, when there is a period in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time, it is late. When the special symbol whose variable display ends is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the effect symbol ends.

Next, the reach display mode (reach) will be described. The reach display mode (reach) in this embodiment is a variable display (variable display) of an effect symbol that has not yet stopped when the stopped effect symbol constitutes a part of the jackpot symbol among the three effect symbols. ) Is performed, and all or part of the effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization while forming all or part of the jackpot symbols.

For example, in the left, middle, and right display areas of the effect symbol display unit 909c, the decorative symbol (for example, "7") that becomes a part of the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the left and right display areas. The display area inside is in a state where variable display is still performed, and a state in which all or part of the symbols in the display area are synchronously and variablely displayed while forming all or part of the jackpot symbols (for example, effect). The reach display mode or reach is a state in which variable display is performed in all of the left, middle, and right display areas of the symbol display unit 909c, and variable display is always performed in a state where the same symbols are always aligned).

In addition, during reach, unusual effects are performed with lamps and sounds. The effect and the reach display mode in the effect symbol display unit 909c are referred to as a reach effect. In addition, at the time of reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from the effect symbol) can be displayed, or the background of the effect symbol display unit 909c (the color or pattern of the ground different from the design and the character). The display mode (for example, color, etc.) of (such as) may be changed.

Next, FIGS. 22 to 24 are views showing a special variable winning ball device 9022. Hereinafter, the special variable winning ball device 9022 will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 to 24. Regarding this embodiment, the structure of the special variable winning ball device 9022 is described with reference to FIGS. 22 to 24, but the size is only slightly smaller than that of the special variable winning ball device 9022, and the variable winning is achieved. The structure of the ball device 9015 is the same as that of the special variable winning ball device 9022.

As shown in FIGS. 22 to 24, the special variable winning ball device 9022 includes a rectangular plate-shaped base plate portion 90101 that is long in the left-right direction. The special variable winning ball device 9022 is fixedly supported in the game area 907 by fixing the base plate portion 90101 to the game area 907 with, for example, a screw. In the substantially central region of the base plate portion 90101, a special winning opening 9024 (second starting winning opening 9014 in the case of the variable winning ball device 9015) that opens toward the front is formed, and a special winning opening in the base plate portion 90101 is formed. At a position above the mouth 9024, a slit-shaped accommodating hole 90102 long in the left-right direction is formed for accommodating the bottom member 9023 on the back side (rear side) of the game area 907 when the bottom member 9023 moves backward. Has been done. In this embodiment, the special winning opening 9024 is specifically formed on the left side of the center of the base plate portion 90101 in the left-right direction, but may be left or right.

The bottom member 9023 is tilted downward to the left so that the game ball that has entered the upper surface from the right flows down to the left, and the accommodation hole 90102 is tilted downward to the left so as to follow the slope of the bottom member 9023. It is formed to do. The bottom member 9023 is movable back and forth between the forward-moved state shown in FIG. 23 and the backward-moved state shown in FIG. 24, and the bottom member 9023 is on the back surface side (rear) of the base plate portion 90101. A drive device (not shown) is arranged to move the vehicle forward and backward.

Returning to FIGS. 22 to 24, a flow path forming base 90112 protruding forward is formed on the front side of the base plate 90101, and a forward movement is formed on the upper portion of the flow path forming base 90112. The upstream region 9023U, which is the upper end (right end) of the bottom member 9023, and the upstream channel 90113, which is connected in the longitudinal direction of the bottom member 9023 and forms a flow path for the game ball together with the bottom member 9023, A downstream region 9023L, which is a lower end (left end) of the bottom member 9023, and a downstream flow path portion 90114, which is connected in the longitudinal direction of the bottom member 9023 and forms a flow path for a game ball together with the bottom member 9023, are formed. There is.

Further, the upper part of the flow path forming base 90112 is recessed downward from the end of the upstream flow path 90113 and the downstream flow path 90114 on the bottom surface member 9023 side, and the special winning openings 9024 are left and right and left and right in front view. A guide flow path portion 90115 is formed so as to surround the bottom member 9023 from below to guide the game ball that has fallen below the bottom member 9023 to the special winning opening 9024.

The upstream side flow path portion 90113 and the downstream side flow path portion 90114 are formed so as to incline downward to the left so as to allow the game ball to flow down to the left. Further, the bottom portion of the guide flow path portion 90115 extends downward to the left toward the special winning opening 9024 side and is recessed at a position in front of the special winning opening 9024. Then, in the recessed space at the bottom of the guide flow path portion 90115, a triangular guide portion 90116 that guides the game ball rearward toward the special winning opening 9024 side (back side of the game area 907) is arranged. ing.

Furthermore, a covering portion 90117 that covers the upstream side flow path portion 90113, the downstream side flow path portion 90114, and the guide flow path portion 90115 from the front is integrally formed on the front portion (player side) of the flow path forming base portion 90112. Has been done. The covering portion 90117 covers the upstream side flow path portion 90113, the downstream side flow path portion 90114, and the guide flow path portion 90115 from the front, so that the game ball flowing down each of these flow path portions bounces toward the glass door frame 902 side. It has a function to prevent it from being lost. In this embodiment, the covering portion 90117 is integrally formed with the flow path forming base portion 90112, but it may be fixed separately.

In the special variable winning ball device 9022, a flow of game balls continuous in the left-right direction, consisting of an upstream side flow path portion 90113, a bottom surface member 9023, and a downstream side flow path portion 90114, between the base plate portion 90101 and the covering portion 90117. Road F is formed. Here, in this embodiment, a plurality of regulation pieces 90118 are formed on the base plate portion 90101 and the covering portion 90117 to reduce the flow speed of the game ball flowing down the flow path F.

In this embodiment, the regulation piece 90118 is integrally formed with the base plate portion 90101 and the covering portion 90117, and is formed in a rib shape protruding forward from the base plate portion 90101 or protruding rearward from the covering portion 90117, and is a game ball. By interfering with, the flow direction of the game ball is changed so that the game ball that flows down to the left meanders with the movement of the front-back direction component, and the time required for the flow is reduced when there is no regulation piece 90118. Delay than. These regulation pieces 90118 are formed so as to be lined up at predetermined intervals in the flow direction of the game balls in the flow path F, and are alternately formed on the base plate portion 90101 and the covering portion 90117. Further, the regulation piece 90118 is set to a width dimension of about 1/3 to 1/4 of the width in the front-rear direction of the bottom member 9023, and is set to a width dimension in which a game ball can pass between adjacent members. There is. More specifically, in this embodiment, one regulation piece 90118 is formed at a portion of the covering portion 90117 that covers the upstream side flow path portion 90113 from the front, and the downstream side flow path portion of the covering portion 90117 is formed. One regulation piece 90118 is formed at a portion that covers the 90114 from the front. Further, in the portion of the base plate portion 90101 and the covering portion 90117 that covers the bottom surface member 9023, a total of five regulation pieces 90118 formed alternately on the base plate portion 90101 and the covering portion 90117 are formed. The number of such regulation pieces 90118 is not particularly limited. Further, in this embodiment, most of the regulation piece 90118 is covered by the covering portion 90117 from the front (player side).

With the arrangement of the regulation piece 90118 as described above, with reference to FIG. 23, the special variable winning ball device 9022 (and the variable winning ball device 9015 having the same configuration) of this embodiment attempts to flow down the flow path F. The game ball P meanders down the flow path F. Then, when the special variable winning ball device 9022 (or the variable winning ball device 9015) in which such a flow path F is formed is closed, the game ball P is placed in the special winning opening 9024 (or the second starting winning opening 9014). Basically, it passes through the special variable winning ball device 9022 (or the variable winning ball device 9015) without winning a prize. On the other hand, referring to FIG. 24, when the special variable winning ball device 9022 (or the variable winning ball device 9015) in which the bottom surface member 9023 is moved backward is opened, the game ball P guides the flow path forming base 90112. It becomes possible to fall into the flow path portion 90115, and it is possible to flow down the guide flow path portion 90115 and win a prize in the special winning opening 9024 (or the second starting winning opening 9014).

FIG. 25 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration on the main board (game control board) 9031. Note that FIG. 25 also shows a payout control board 9037, an effect control board 9080, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to a game control means) 90560 that controls a pachinko game machine 901 according to a program is mounted on the main board 9031. The game control microcomputer 90560 includes a ROM 9054 that stores a program for game control (game progress control), a RAM 9055 as a storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 9056 that performs control operations according to the program, and an I / O port unit 9057. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 9054 and the RAM 9055 are built into the game control microcomputer 90560. That is, the game control microcomputer 90560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer may have at least a CPU 9056 and a RAM 9055 built-in, and the ROM 9054 may be externally attached or built-in. Further, the I / O port portion 9057 may be externally attached.

Since the CPU 9056 of the game control microcomputer 90560 executes control according to the program stored in the ROM 9054, the game control microcomputer 90560 (or CPU 9056) executes (or performs processing) below. Specifically, the CPU 9056 executes control according to a program. This also applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 9031.

Further, the detection signals from the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, the first count switch 9023a, the second count switch 9025a, the gate switch 9032a, and the operation gate switch 9017a are given to the game control microcomputer 90560. The input driver circuit 9058 is also mounted on the main board 9031 to control the game of the solenoid 9021 that opens and closes the special variable winning ball device 9020, the solenoid 90106 that opens and closes the special variable winning ball device 9022, and the solenoid 90206 that opens and closes the variable winning ball device 9015. An output circuit 9059 that is driven according to a command from the computer 90560 is also mounted on the main board 9031, and a system reset circuit (not shown) for resetting the game control microcomputer 90560 when the power is turned on and a big hit game state are generated. An information output circuit (not shown) that outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the above to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 9031. The main board 9031 is also provided with a test signal output circuit (not shown) for outputting the test signal to the outside of the game machine.

In this embodiment, the effect control means (consisting of the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 9080 issues an effect control command from the game control microcomputer 90560 via the relay board 9077. Display control is performed between the first variable display unit 909a and the second variable display unit 909b that receive and variably display the decorative symbol, the effect symbol display unit 909c that variably displays the effect symbol, and the symbol hold storage display unit 9018c.

FIG. 26 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of the relay board 9077, the effect control board 9080, the lamp driver board 9035, and the audio output board 9070. In the example shown in FIG. 26, the lamp driver board 9035 and the audio output board 9070 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but a microcomputer may be mounted. Further, the lamp driver board 9035 and the audio output board 9070 may not be provided, and only the effect control board 9080 may be provided for the effect control.

The effect control board 9080 is equipped with an effect control microcomputer 90200 including a effect control CPU 90201 and a RAM. The RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 9080, the effect control CPU 90201 operates according to a program stored in an internal or external ROM (not shown), and a capture signal (capture signal) from the main board 9031 input via the relay board 9077. The effect control command is received via the input driver 90202 and the input port 90203 in response to the effect control INT signal). Further, the effect control CPU 90201 causes the VDP (video display processor) 90209 to control the display of the effect display device 909 based on the effect control command.

The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 90202 on the effect control board 9080. The input driver 90202 passes the signal input from the relay board 9077 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 9080 (the signal does not pass in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 9080 to the relay board 9077). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulatory means.

As a signal direction regulating means, the relay board 9077 allows the signal input from the main board 9031 to pass only in the direction toward the effect control board 9080 (the signal does not pass in the direction from the effect control board 9080 to the relay board 9077). The unidirectional circuit 9074 of the above is mounted. As a unidirectional circuit, for example, a diode or a transistor is used. FIG. 26 illustrates a diode. Further, a unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Further, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 9031 via the output port 90571 which is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 9077 to the inside of the main board 9031 is regulated. That is, the signal from the relay board 9077 does not enter the inside of the main board 9031 (on the side of the game control microcomputer 90560). The output port 90571 is a part of the I / O port portion 9057 shown in FIG. 25. Further, a signal driver circuit which is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided on the outside of the output port 90571 (on the relay board 9077 side).

Further, the effect control CPU 90201 outputs a signal for driving the lamp to the lamp driver board 9035 via the input / output port 90205. Further, the effect control CPU 90201 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 9070 via the input / output port 90204.

In the lamp driver board 9035, the signal for driving the lamp is input to the lamp driver 90352 via the input / output driver 90351. The lamp driver 90352 amplifies the signal for driving the lamp and supplies the signal to each lamp provided on the frame side such as the top frame lamp 9028a, the left frame lamp 9028b, and the right frame lamp 9028c. It also supplies the decorative lamp 9025 provided on the frame side. Further, in this embodiment, the special winning opening lamp 9024a is provided in the special variable winning ball device 9022, and the lamp driver 90352 amplifies the signal for driving the lamp and supplies it to the special winning opening lamp 9024a.

In the voice output board 9070, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 90703 via the input / output driver 90702. The voice synthesis IC 90703 generates voices and sound effects corresponding to the sound number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit 90705. The amplifier circuit 90705 outputs a voice signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the voice synthesis IC 90703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 90706 to the speaker 9027. The voice data ROM 90704 stores control data according to the sound number data. The control data according to the sound number data is a collection of data showing the output mode of the sound effect or the sound in a predetermined period (for example, the fluctuation period of the decorative symbol) in chronological order.

The signal and sound number data for driving the lamp are bidirectional communication (such as transmitting a response signal from the signal receiving side to the transmitting side) between the effect control CPU 90201, the lamp driver board 9035, and the audio output board 9070. Communicated by communication).

The effect control CPU 90201 reads necessary data from the character ROM (not shown) according to the received effect control command. The character ROM stores in advance character image data that is frequently used among the images displayed on the effect display device 909, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including decorative patterns and effect symbols). It is for keeping. The effect control CPU 90201 outputs the data read from the character ROM to the VDP 90209. The VDP90209 executes display control based on the data input from the effect control CPU 90201.

In this embodiment, the VDP 90209 that controls the display of the effect display device 909 is mounted on the effect control board 9080. The VDP90209 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 90200, and VRAM is mapped therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data generated by VDP. Then, the VDP90209 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 909.

In this embodiment, the effect control board 9080, the audio output board 9070, and the lamp driver board 9035 are provided as the board on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted. However, the circuit for controlling the effect device is 1 It may be mounted on one board. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 is mounted, and a second effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamp, LED, speaker 9027, etc.) is mounted. You may provide two boards with the effect control board of. Further, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 90560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 90200, but another board (for example, the audio output board 9070 and the lamp shown in FIG. 26). It may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90200 on the effect control board 9080 via the driver board 9035 or the like). In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or a control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 9070 or the lamp driver board 9035, and the control means receives the command. Controls related to voice control and lamp control are executed, and the received command is changed to a simplified command as it is or, for example, a simplified command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90200 that controls the effect display device 909. You may. Further, when two boards, a first effect control board and a second effect control board, are provided, a command related to the effect from the game control microcomputer 90560 is transmitted to the second effect control board. The command is transmitted from the second effect control board to the first effect control board as it is, or after processing (for example, changing the form or content of the command, simplifying, or selecting only the necessary command). It may be configured to be.

Next, the operation of the game machine will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 90560 on the main board 9031. When the power is turned on to the game machine and the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high, the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056) determines whether the program content is valid or not. After executing the security check process, which is a process for confirming whether or not, the main process after step S901 is started. In the main process, the CPU 9056 first makes necessary initial settings.

In the initial setting process, the CPU 9056 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S901). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S902), and the stack pointer designated address is set in the stack pointer (step S903). Then, the built-in device is initialized (the built-in device (built-in peripheral circuit) CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) are initialized, etc.) (step S904). In the interrupt mode 2, the interrupt address is the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 9056 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output by the built-in device. This is the mode that indicates.

Next, the CPU 9056 confirms the state of the output signal of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port only once (step S906). When the ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 9056 executes a normal initialization process (steps S901 to S9015).

If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing in the backup RAM area (for example, processing when power supply is stopped such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the game machine was stopped. (Step S907). After confirming that such protection processing has not been performed, the CPU 9056 executes the initialization processing. Whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed by, for example, the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop processing. In this example, if "55H" is set in the backup flag area, it means that there is backup (on state), and if a value other than "55H" is set, it means that there is no backup (off state).

After confirming that there is a backup, the CPU 9056 performs a data check (parity check in this example) in the backup RAM area (step S908). In step S908, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop processing. If the data is restored after the power supply is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, the initialization process executed when the power is turned on, which is not the time when the power supply is stopped, is executed.

If the check result is normal, the CPU 9056 performs a game state restoration process for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 9054 is set in the pointer (step S9091), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 9055) (step S9092). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. By the processing of steps S9091 and S9092, the saved contents remain as they are for the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The parts that should not be initialized are, for example, data indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, etc.), the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer), and the unpaid prize ball. This is the part where the data indicating the number is set.

Further, the CPU 9056 sets the start address of the backup command transmission table stored in the ROM 9054 as a pointer (step S9093), and a control command (power) indicating that the power supply has been restored to the effect control board 9080 according to the contents. A recovery command as an initialization command at the time of supply recovery) is controlled to be transmitted (step S9094). Then, the process proceeds to step S9015.

In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the backup RAM area is stored by using both the backup flag and the check data, but only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity to execute the state recovery process.

In the initialization process, the CPU 9056 first performs a RAM clear process (step S9010). Note that the entire area of the RAM 9055 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for jackpot determination) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization table set in the ROM 9054 is set in the pointer (step S9011), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S9012).

By the processing of steps S9011 and S9012, for example, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, a prize ball in-ball flag, a ball out flag, a payout stop flag, and the like are selectively processed according to a control state. The initial value is set in the flag for.

Further, the CPU 9056 sets the start address of the initialization command transmission table stored in the ROM 9054 in the pointer (step S9013), and transmits an initialization command for initializing the sub-board according to the contents to the sub-board. The process is executed (step S9014). As the initialization command, there is a command indicating an initial symbol displayed on the effect display device 909.

Then, in step S9015, the CPU 9056 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 90560 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied at predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, as an initial value, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that the timer is interrupted periodically every 4 ms.

When the execution of the initialization process (steps S901 to S9015) is completed, the CPU 9056 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S9017) and the initial value random number update process (step S9018) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt prohibited state is set (step S9016), and when the execution of the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process is completed, the interrupt enabled state is set. Set (step S9019). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern, and the display random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. Further, the initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. The initial value random number is a random number for determining the initial value of the count value, such as a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to make a big hit (a random number generation counter for determining a big hit). A game control process that controls the progress of a game, which will be described later (a game control microcomputer 90560 controls a game device such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, and a ball payout device provided in the game machine. In the process of performing, or the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, also referred to as the game device control process), the count value of the big hit determination random number generation counter, etc. The initial value is set in the counter when the step is taken by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible values.

When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 9056 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S9020 to S9034 shown in FIG. 28. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power failure detection process for detecting whether or not a power failure signal has been output (whether or not it has been turned on) is executed (step S9020). The power off signal is output when, for example, the voltage drop monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a voltage drop of the power supply supplied to the game machine. Then, in the power supply cutoff detection process, when the CPU 9056 detects that the power supply cutoff signal has been output, the CPU 9056 executes a power supply stop time process for saving the necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, the detection signals of the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, the first count switch 9023a, the second count switch 9025a, the gate switch 9032a, and the operation gate switch 9017a are input via the input driver circuit 9058. Then, the state of them is determined (switch processing: step S9021).

Next, the CPU 9056 performs a display control process for controlling the display of the first special symbol display 908a, the second special symbol display 908b, the first special symbol holding storage display 9018a, and the second special symbol holding storage display 9018b. Execute (step S9022). For the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b, control for outputting a drive signal to each display is executed according to the contents of the output buffer set in step S9032.

Next, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a random number for jackpot determination used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S9023). The CPU 9056 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S9024, S9025).

FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1': Determines whether or not to generate a big hit or whether or not to generate a small hit (for big hit and small hit determination).
(2) Random 2': Determines which type of jackpot, that is, 2R normal jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 6R normal jackpot, 6R probability variation jackpot, or 16R probability variation jackpot (for determining the jackpot type).
(3) Random 5': Determine the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (for determining the fluctuation pattern)
(4) Random 6': Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination).
(5) Random 7': Determine the initial value of random 1'(for determining the initial value of random 1')
(6) Random 8': Determine the initial value of random 6'(for determining the initial value of random 6')
In step S9023 in the game control process shown in FIG. 28, the game control microcomputer 90560 has (1) a big hit, a small hit determination random number, (2) a big hit type determination random number, and (4) a normal symbol. The counter for generating a random number for hit determination is counted up (1 addition). That is, they are random numbers for determination, and random numbers other than these are random numbers for display or random numbers for initial values. In addition, random numbers other than the above-mentioned random numbers (1) to (6) are also used in order to enhance the game effect. Further, in this embodiment, a common random number (random number 2') is provided as a random number for determining the type of big hit and a random number for determining the type of small hit, but different random numbers are provided for each. There may be.

Further, the CPU 9056 performs the first special symbol process process (step S9026A). In the first special symbol process process, the corresponding process is executed according to the first special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 908a and the special variable winning ball device 9020 in a predetermined order according to the game state. The CPU 9056 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag during each process according to the game state. Next, the CPU 9056 performs the second special symbol process process (step S9026B). In the second special symbol process process, according to the second special symbol process flag for controlling the second special symbol display 908b, the special variable winning ball device 9020, and the special variable winning ball device 9022 in a predetermined order according to the game state. Execute the corresponding process. The CPU 9056 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag during each process according to the game state. Then, the CPU 9056 performs a normal symbol process process (step S9026C). In the normal symbol process process, the corresponding process is executed according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the normal symbol display 9010 and the variable winning ball device 9015 in a predetermined order according to the game state. The CPU 9056 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag during each process according to the game state.

Next, the CPU 9056 performs the hold storage process (step S9027a). In the hold storage process, the CPU 9056 executes a process of calculating and managing the total number (total hold storage number) which is the total of the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number.

Next, the CPU 9056 performs a process of transmitting an effect control command related to display control of the first variable display unit 909a and the second variable display unit 909b and an effect control command related to the number of reserved storages (effect control command control process: step S9028).

Further, the CPU 9056 performs an information output process for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to the hall management computer (step S9029).

Further, the CPU 9056 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, the first count switch 9023a, and the second count switch 9025a. (Step S9030). Specifically, the payout control board 9037 responds to the winning detection based on any of the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, the first count switch 9023a, and the second count switch 9025a being turned on. A payout control command indicating the number of prize balls is output to the payout control microcomputer mounted on the. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 9097 in response to a payout control command indicating the number of prize balls.

In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 9056 sets the content related to the on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area of the output port to the output port. Output (step S9031: output processing).

Further, the CPU 9056 sets the first special symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the first special symbol according to the value of the first special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the first special symbol display control data. At the same time, the special symbol display for setting the second special symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the second special symbol according to the value of the second special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the second special symbol display control data. Control processing is performed (step S9032). For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the CPU 9056 increments the value of the display control data set in the output buffer every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 9056 outputs a drive signal in step S9022 according to the display control data set in the output buffer, so that the special symbol display on the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b can be variably displayed. To execute.

Further, the CPU 9056 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting the normal symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the normal symbol according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data ( Step S9033). For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the CPU 9056 increments the value of the display control data set in the output buffer every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 9056 executes variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 9010 by outputting a drive signal in step S9022 according to the display control data set in the output buffer. After that, the interrupt permission state is set (step S9034), and the process ends.

With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the process of steps S9021 to S9033 (excluding step S9029) in the timer interrupt process. Further, in this embodiment, the game control process is executed in the timer interrupt process, but in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is the main process. It may be executed in.

In this embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variablely displayed by the two indicators, the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b, but the CPU 9056 uses the CPU 9056. Control is performed so that big hits do not occur at the same time on the two indicators.

FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit determination table and a small hit determination table. FIG. 30A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 9054, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with random 1'is set. The jackpot judgment table includes a jackpot judgment table at the time of non-probability change used in a low probability state (low probability / non-KT state, low probability / first KT state) and a probability change state (high probability state (high probability / first KT state, high). There is a jackpot judgment table at the time of probability change used in probability / second KT state)). Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 30 is set in the non-probability change jackpot determination table, and each numerical value described in the right column of FIG. 30 is set in the probability variation jackpot determination table. .. The numerical value shown in FIG. 30A is the jackpot determination value.

The CPU 9056 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 90503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number (random 1'). The big hit determination random number value is shown in FIG. 30 (A). If any of the indicated jackpot judgment values is matched, it is decided to make a jackpot for the special symbol. The "probability" shown in FIG. 30 (A) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, deciding whether or not to make a big hit means deciding whether or not to shift to the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design.

Further, FIG. 30B is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 9054, and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with random 1'is set. In the small hit determination table, the determination value is not set for the first special symbol, and the small hit determination value is set only for the second special symbol.

The CPU 9056 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 90503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the small hit determination random number (random 1'). The small hit determination random number value is shown in FIG. 30 (B). If any of the small hit judgment values shown in) is matched, it is decided to make a small hit for the special symbol. The "probability" shown in FIG. 30B indicates the probability (ratio) of a small hit. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to the small hit game state, but whether or not to make the stop symbol on the second special symbol display 908b a small hit symbol It also means deciding whether or not.

In this embodiment, if it is decided not to make a big hit when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, all of them are unconditionally missed. Further, when it is decided not to make a big hit when executing the variation display of the second special symbol, the small hit is determined by the small hit determination table of FIG. 30 (B).

FIG. 31 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table 90131a stored in the ROM 9054. The jackpot type determination table 90131a sets the jackpot type to "2R normal jackpot" or "2R normal jackpot" based on a random number (random 2') for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. It is a table referred to for determining one of "2R probability variation jackpot", "6R normal jackpot", "6R probability variation jackpot", or "16R probability variation jackpot".

As shown in FIG. 31 (A), in this embodiment, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the probability of "16R probability variation jackpot" is determined with a probability of 20%, and the probability of "16R probability variation jackpot" is 45%. It is determined as "6R probability variation jackpot", and it is determined as "6R normal jackpot" with a probability of 35%. Further, as shown in FIG. 31 (B), in this embodiment, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of "16R probability variation jackpot" is determined with a probability of 30%, and the probability of 30%. Is determined as "6R probability variation jackpot", 5% probability is determined as "2R probability variation jackpot", and 35% probability is determined as "2R normal jackpot".

The "16R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the jackpot game state of 16 rounds and shifts to the high probability / second KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (in this embodiment, the probability variation state is shifted). At the same time, it shifts to the second KT state). Then, the probabilistic state and the second KT state continue until the next big hit occurs.

However, in this embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, if it is in the non-KT state before the start of the big hit, even if it becomes the "16R probability variation big hit", it is not in the second KT state. It may shift to the first KT state.

The "6R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the jackpot game state of 6 rounds and shifts to the high probability / first KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (in this embodiment, the probability variation state is shifted). At the same time, it shifts to the 1st KT state). Then, the probabilistic state and the first KT state continue until the next big hit occurs.

The "6R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 6 rounds and shifts to only the first KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Then, after shifting to the first KT state, when the variation display is completed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), the first KT state ends. Even before the end of the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times, the first KT state is ended even when the next big hit occurs.

The "2R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the jackpot game state of two rounds and shifts to the high probability / first KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (in this embodiment, the probability variation state is shifted). At the same time, it shifts to the 1st KT state). Then, the probabilistic state and the first KT state continue until the next big hit occurs.

The "2R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of two rounds and shifts to only the first KT state after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Then, after shifting to the first KT state, when the variation display is completed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), the first KT state ends. Even before the end of the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times, the first KT state is ended even when the next big hit occurs.

The type of jackpot type is not limited to the one shown in this embodiment. When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in addition to the 16R probability variation jackpot, the 2R probability variation jackpot, and the 2R normal jackpot, the 3R probability variation jackpot to the 7R probability variation jackpot may be configured to be determinable. Be done.

32 to 34 are explanatory views showing a variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol and the decorative symbol used in this embodiment. The EXT shown in FIGS. 32 to 34 is the second byte data of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each fluctuation pattern.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 32 to 34, seven types of first variation patterns # 01 to # 07 for the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol, and a second variation pattern for the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol. Twenty-five types of # A to # 18 are used. Hereinafter, for example, when the fluctuation pattern #n (n = 01 to 07 or A to 18) is used, it means both the first fluctuation pattern #n and the second fluctuation pattern #n.

When executing the variation display of the first special symbol, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern table for the first special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. 32 (A) is displayed. It is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 32 (A), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 01 to # 05.

When the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, in the case of the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state), the KT shown in FIG. 32 (B). The variation pattern table for the first special symbol for time is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 32 (B), when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in the KT state, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns # 06 to # 07.

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for non-KT shown in FIG. 33 (C) is displayed. It is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 33 (C), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # A to # 02. Specifically, when it is determined to be out of alignment, the second variation pattern # A is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. When it is determined to be a small hit, the second variation pattern # 01 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when the jackpot is determined, the second variation pattern # 02 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed for a certain period of 5 minutes.

In this embodiment, even in the non-KT state, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and a small hit is obtained, a certain amount of prize balls can be expected by winning the game ball to the special prize opening 9024. It will occur. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 33 (C), even if the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the fluctuation time is extremely lengthened and the execution frequency of the fluctuation display is reduced. By making it, the frequency of small hits is reduced, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which a small hit is aimed at winning a prize ball even in a non-KT state.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 33 (C), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the variation time is set to 5 even in the case of a big hit. By making it relatively long, it is possible to prevent the act of aiming at the prize ball by unreasonably winning the special winning opening 9024 during the non-KT state. However, in the case of a big hit, it is not necessary to lengthen the digestion of the first reserved memory as compared with the case of a small hit, so the fluctuation time is configured to be shorter than in the case of a small hit. There is.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in the low probability / first KT state, the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / first KT state is terminated. The fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations since then. In this case, when executing the fluctuation display of the first fluctuation, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the first fluctuation shown in FIG. 33 (D) is selected and the fluctuation pattern is set. It is determined. As shown in FIG. 33 (D), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the low probability / first KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # B to # 04. Will be done.

As shown in FIG. 33 (D), when the small hit is determined as the first fluctuation in the low probability / first KT state, the second fluctuation is a relatively long fluctuation time of 7 seconds as the small hit. Pattern # 03 (variable pattern for preparing to open the second starting winning opening) is determined. In this embodiment, as described above, when the first KT state is controlled, the frequency of small hits increases, but by lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015, a special variable winning is actually achieved. The special winning opening 9024 in the ball device 9022 is set so as to rarely win a prize. However, in the state immediately after the transition to the low probability / first KT state, there is a possibility that a certain amount of game balls are accumulated on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 9015 or the special variable winning ball device 9022, and the special variable winning ball is immediately available. If the device 9022 is controlled to be in the open state, there is a possibility that a considerable number of game balls will win the special winning opening 9024. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the first variation of the first KT state, by securing a variation time of at least 7 seconds, the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022 are used even before the transition to the first KT state. By controlling the special variable winning ball device 9022 to the open state after a sufficient time has passed until all the game balls accumulated on the bottom member fall, it is possible to win a prize in the special winning opening 9024. It prevents a situation in which a prize ball more than expected is obtained in the first KT state.

Further, if the fluctuation display of the 2nd to 99th fluctuations is executed after the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / 1st KT state is executed, FIG. 33 (E). The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and the 2nd to 99th fluctuations shown in is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern. As shown in FIG. 33 (E), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, any one of the second fluctuation patterns # C to # 07 Will be decided. Further, as shown in FIG. 33 (E), when a small hit is determined as the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state, the fluctuation time is as short as 5 seconds, and the second fluctuation pattern # 05 of the shortened fluctuation. May be decided. In this embodiment, when the small hit is determined as the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / first KT state and the fluctuation display is executed based on the second fluctuation pattern # 07, the effect display device 909 In the variable display of the effect symbol in, the effect of fanning the pattern is executed, such as reaching or sliding effect.

In addition, the 100th variation display (that is, the final variation in the low probability / 1st KT state) is executed after the jackpot game based on the 6R normal jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot that triggered the low probability / 1st KT state is completed. If this is the case, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and 100th variation shown in FIG. 33 (F) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 33 (F), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the 100th variation in the low probability / first KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # D to # 09. Will be done.

In this embodiment, when the low probability / first KT state is controlled, for example, a character display such as "during chance time" is displayed on the effect display device 909. As shown in FIG. 33 (F), when a small hit is determined as the 100th variation in the low probability / first KT state, the effect display device 909 displays a character such as "chance time ends !!" The second variation pattern # 08 is determined to be accompanied by. Further, as shown in FIG. 33 (F), when a big hit is determined as the 100th variation of the low probability / first KT state, the effect display device 909 displays characters such as "chance time ends !!" The second variation pattern # 09 with a predetermined revival display after the display is determined.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 32, when a big hit is obtained in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the KT state, the first fluctuation pattern # 07 having a fluctuation time of 1 minute is determined. It is configured as follows. This is a case where a jackpot occurs immediately on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol immediately after shifting to the second KT state, and if the fluctuation time of the jackpot is set to the same short fluctuation time as the outlier, the player You will not be able to receive any profit from small hits. Therefore, in this embodiment, even in such a case, a sufficient time (1 minute in this example) at least a plurality of small hits can be generated is secured.

When executing the variable display of the second special symbol, if it is in the high probability / first KT state, the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot or the 2R probability variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state is terminated. The fluctuation pattern table is selected according to the number of fluctuations since then. In this case, when executing the fluctuation display of the first fluctuation, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the high probability / first KT and the first fluctuation shown in FIG. 34 (G) is selected and the fluctuation pattern is set. It is determined. As shown in FIG. 34 (G), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # E to # 12. Will be done.

As in the case of the first variation in the low probability / first KT state, as shown in FIG. 34 (G), the second start winning is also made when the small hit is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state. The fluctuation pattern for preparing to open the mouth (second fluctuation pattern # 10) may be determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 34 (G), when a big hit is determined as the first fluctuation of the high probability / first KT state, a battle for suggesting whether or not the probability change state (high probability state) ends. The second variation pattern # 12 including the effect is determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 34 (G), even when a small hit is determined as the first variation in the high probability / first KT state, the second variation pattern # 11 including the battle effect may be determined.

Further, in the case of executing the fluctuation display after the second fluctuation after finishing the jackpot game based on the 6R probability variation jackpot or the 2R probability variation jackpot that triggered the high probability / first KT state, FIG. 34 (H) shows. The second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for the high probability / first KT and for the second and subsequent fluctuations is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern. As shown in FIG. 34 (H), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state, any of the second fluctuation patterns # F to # 15 is applied. It is determined.

As in the case of the 2nd to 99th fluctuations in the low probability / 1st KT state, as shown in FIG. 34 (H), when the small hit is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / 1st KT state, the fluctuations occur. The second variation pattern # 13 of the shortened variation with a short time of 5 seconds may be determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 34 (H), when a big hit is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations of the high probability / first KT state, it is for suggesting whether or not the probability change state (high probability state) ends. The second variation pattern # 15 including the battle effect is determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 34 (H), the second fluctuation pattern # 14 including the battle effect may be determined even when the small hit is determined as the second and subsequent fluctuations in the high probability / first KT state. ..

When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, in the case of the high probability / second KT state, the variation pattern table for the second special symbol for the high probability / second KT shown in FIG. 34 (I) is selected. The fluctuation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 34 (I), when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / second KT state, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns # G to # 18.

As shown in FIG. 34 (I), when a small hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the shortening fluctuation occurs in the first KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state). The second fluctuation pattern # 16 of the shortened fluctuation, which has a shorter fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds than when the fluctuation display is executed, may be determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 34 (I), when the small hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, the second variation including the continuation effect suggesting whether or not the high probability / second KT state continues. It may be determined by pattern # 17. Further, as shown in FIG. 34 (I), when a big hit is determined in the high probability / second KT state, a battle for suggesting whether or not the probability change state (high probability state) ends after the continuous production. The second variation pattern # 18 including the effect is determined.

In this embodiment, when a variable pattern including a continuous effect or a battle effect is determined, the effect display device 909 executes the continuous effect or the battle effect in the variable display of the effect symbol. When it becomes a big hit (16R probability change big hit, 6R probability change big hit, 2R probability change big hit), the production of the winning mode is executed in the battle production, and when it becomes a normal big hit (6R normal big hit, 2R normal big hit), in the battle production. The effect of the defeat mode is executed, and in the case of a small hit, the effect of the draw mode is executed in the battle effect. Not limited to the mode shown in this embodiment, for example, even in the case of a 2R probability variation big hit in which the number of rounds during the big hit game is small, the effect of the defeat mode may be executed in the battle effect. ..

When determining the variation pattern of the shortened variation of the second variation pattern # 05, # 13, # 16, for example, the variation pattern of the shortened variation is determined at a different rate according to the number of reserved storages. May be good. For example, as the number of reserved memories increases, the fluctuation pattern of the shortened fluctuation may be determined at a high rate so that the reserved memories are digested earlier and the operating rate may be increased.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, when the shortening variation of 5 seconds is executed in the case of the first KT state and the shortening variation of 1.5 seconds is executed even shorter in the case of the second KT state. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured to execute a shortening variation of 5 seconds in the low probability state and a shorter shortening variation of 1.5 seconds in the high probability state.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the KT state will be described. FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the KT state. Of these, FIG. 35 (1) shows the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the first KT state, and FIG. 35 (2) shows the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special in the second KT state. The opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 9022 is shown.

First, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the first KT state will be described with reference to FIG. 35 (1). As shown in FIG. 35 (1), when the game ball passes through the gate 9032 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the normal symbol display 9010 executes the variable display of the normal symbol, and the normal symbol hits. If it is determined that, the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 9010, and if it is determined to be off, the outlier symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 9010. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 35 (1), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the symbol confirmation time for deriving and displaying the hit symbol and the missed symbol is 0.2 seconds. .. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 35 (1), after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the time before the second start winning opening opening process of 0.1 seconds has elapsed. After that, the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened for 5.5 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening 9014.

If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening 9014 while the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit, , The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 35 (1), the special variable winning ball device 9022 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the special winning opening 9024. It becomes. However, in the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 35 (1), the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 9022 on the downstream side is as short as 0.8 seconds, whereas the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015 on the upstream side is as short as 0.8 seconds. The opening time is as long as 5.5 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although a small hit is likely to occur, it is extremely rare for a game ball to win a prize in the special winning opening 9024 (for example, about one ball for every 100 fluctuation display).

In the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 35 (1), after the opening of the variable winning ball device 9015 is completed, the next variable winning ball device 9015 can be opened due to the change of the next normal symbol. It is after at least 0.5 seconds, which is the sum of the time 0.2 seconds, the symbol confirmation time 0.2 seconds, and the second start winning opening pre-opening processing time 0.1 seconds. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the first KT state, a closing period of at least 0.5 seconds is provided as an interval period after the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022 in the second KT state will be described with reference to FIG. 35 (2). As shown in FIG. 35 (2), when the game ball passes through the gate 9032 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the normal symbol display 9010 executes the variable display of the normal symbol, and the normal symbol hits. If it is determined that, the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 9010, and if it is determined to be off, the outlier symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 9010. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 35 (2), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the symbol confirmation time for deriving and displaying the hit symbol or the missed symbol is 0.2 seconds. .. Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 35 (2), after the symbol confirmation time of 0.2 seconds has elapsed, the time before the second start winning opening opening process of 2.6 seconds has elapsed. After that, the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened for 0.5 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening 9014.

If a game ball wins in the second starting winning opening 9014 while the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, and if it is decided to make a small hit, , The small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 35 (2), the special variable winning ball device 9022 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and the game ball can be won in the special winning opening 9024. It becomes.

In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015 is as short as 0.5 seconds. Further, in this embodiment, in the second KT state, the interval period (closing period) after the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened is at least 3.0 seconds (normal symbol variation time 0.2 seconds + symbol determination time 0). A relatively long period of .2 seconds + time before the opening process of the second start winning opening is 2.6 seconds) is secured. Therefore, in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 35 (2), the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015 on the upstream side is short and the interval period (closing period) is long, so that the downstream side is compared with the first KT state. It is easy for the game ball to enter the special variable winning ball device 9022 of the above, and it is easy for the game ball to win the special winning opening 9024.

In this embodiment, the process of executing the variable display of the normal symbol and controlling the opening of the variable winning ball device 9015 is a normal symbol process process by the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056). This is done by executing (see step S9026C). In addition, the game control microcomputer 90560 also executes a process of determining whether or not to hit a normal symbol in the normal symbol process process of step S9026C, but the same probability (for example, 10%) regardless of the game state. ) Determines whether or not it is a normal figure. Specifically, regardless of whether or not the gaming state is a probabilistic state (high probability state), whether it is a non-KT state, a first KT state or a second KT state, or whether it is a jackpot gaming state. , Determine whether or not to hit the normal map with the same probability.

In this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the symbol confirmation time are the same in the first KT state and the second KT state by 0.2 seconds each, and the time before the opening processing of the second start winning opening is the second. The case where the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 9015 is changed by shortening it to 0.1 seconds in the 1 KT state and lengthening it to 2.6 seconds in the second KT state has been shown, but only in such an embodiment. I can't. For example, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 9015 may be different by making the fluctuation time and the symbol determination time different between the first KT state and the second KT state. Further, for example, the time after the second start winning opening opening process after closing the variable winning ball device 9015 is configured to be controllable, and the time after the second starting winning opening opening process differs between the first KT state and the second KT state. The closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 9015 may be different depending on the setting. In particular, if the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 9015 in the first KT state is shortened by any of the above methods, it is possible to suppress winning of the special winning opening 9024 in the first KT state. it can.

Further, for example, a special flag (opening extension flag) indicating that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015 is extended is provided, and if the special flag is set, the variable winning as shown in FIG. 35 (1) is provided. A second opening pattern (long opening) in which the ball device 9015 is opened for a long time and the variable winning ball device 9015 shown in FIG. 35 (2) is opened for a short time if a special flag is not set. It may be configured to be controlled by short opening).

Further, even in the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015 may be shortened when the final variation display in the low probability / first KT state is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity that the variable winning ball device 9015 is long open when performing a left-handed notification after the end of the low probability / first KT state.

Further, the variable winning ball device 9015 may be configured to be short-opened in the low probability / non-KT state. With such a configuration, when the variable winning ball device 9015 is configured to have a high opening probability in a low probability / non-KT state (left-handed state), only a few game balls are fired. It is possible to prevent the variable winning ball device 9015 from winning a prize, and it is possible to prevent the right-handed operation from being performed during the low probability / non-KT state.

36 and 37 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control microcomputer 90200. In the example shown in FIG. 36, the commands 8000 (H) to 8007 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8022 (H) are the first variable display unit 909a or the second variable display unit corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. This is an effect control command (variation pattern command) that specifies a variation pattern of the decorative pattern that is variably displayed in 909b. The effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for designating the fluctuation start. Therefore, when the effect control microcomputer 90200 receives any of the commands 8000 (H) to 8007 (H) and 8011 (H) to 8022 (H), the first variable display unit 909a or the second variable display unit 909b Controls to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (missing designation command) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is to be missed. The command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command (16R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 16R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9003 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command (6R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 6R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command (6R normal jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 6R normal jackpot. .. The command 9005 (H) is an effect control command (display result 5 designation command (2R probability variation jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 2R probability variation jackpot. .. The command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 designation command (2R normal jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the 2R normal jackpot. .. The command 9007 (H) is an effect control command (display result 7 designation command (small hit designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is a small hit.

Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 7 designation command may be referred to as a display result designation command. In this embodiment, since the game control microcomputer 90560 transmits the display result designation command immediately before the fluctuation pattern command, the display result designation received by the game control microcomputer 90560 immediately before the first fluctuation pattern command is specified. Since the command can be determined to be the display result specification command for the first decorative symbol, and the display result specification command received immediately before the second variation pattern command can be determined to be the display result specification command for the second decorative symbol. The display result designation command can be used for both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, but the display result designation command for the first decorative symbol and the display result designation command for the second decorative symbol may be separated.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 90560 does not send a display result specification command, but corresponds to each of 15R probability variation jackpot / 6R probability variation jackpot / 6R normal jackpot / 2R probability variation jackpot / 2R normal jackpot / small hit / miss. The variation pattern command may be determined, and the effect control microcomputer 90200 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern command.

The command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation designation command (first decorative symbol stop designation command)) for instructing the stop of the variable display of the first decorative symbol. The command A001 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation designation command (second decorative symbol stop designation command)) for instructing the stop of the variable display of the second decorative symbol.

The command BXXX (H) (X = arbitrary hexadecimal number) is an effect control command sent from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game. Among them, B000 (H) is an effect control command (first jackpot start designation command: first fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the first jackpot game. B001 (H) is an effect control command (first jackpot end designation command: first ending designation command) for designating the end of the first jackpot game. B002 (H) is an effect control command (second jackpot start designation command: second fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the second jackpot game. B003 (H) is an effect control command (second jackpot end designation command: second ending designation command) for designating the end of the second jackpot game. B004 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) for designating the start of the small hit game. B005 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game.

The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (display command during the opening of the big winning opening) that specifies the display during the round during the big hit game. The number of rounds to be displayed in "XX" is set. The command B2XX (H) is an effect control command (display command after opening the big winning opening) that specifies the display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the big hit game.

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (a command for designating a prize in the prize opening) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the prize opening. The command B401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning opening winning designation command) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the special winning opening.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first effective start prize designation command) indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the first start winning opening 9013 in a state where the first reserved memory number has not reached 4. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second effective start prize designation command) indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the second start winning opening 9014 in a state where the second reserved memory number has not reached 4. A command indicating the number of first reserved storages may be transmitted as the first valid start prize designation command, and a command indicating the second reserved storage number may be transmitted as the second valid start prize designation command. Then, the first effective start prize designation command and the second valid start prize designation command are commands indicating that there is a start prize.

The command D000 (H) is an effect control command for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

The command E000 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / non-KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the low probability / non-KT state. The command E001 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / first KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the gaming state is the low probability / first KT state. The command E002 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / first KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the high probability / first KT state. The command E003 (H) is an effect control command (high accuracy / second KT background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the high probability / second KT state.

The effect control microcomputer 90200 (specifically, the effect control CPU 90201) mounted on the effect control board 9080 receives the above-mentioned effect control command from the game control microcomputer 90560 mounted on the main board 9031. Then, the display state of the first variable display unit 909a and the second variable display unit 909b and the display state of the effect symbol display unit 909c are changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, and the display state of the lamp is changed. Then, the sound number data is output to the voice output board 9070. The effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 36 and 37 are also transmitted from the main board 9031 to the effect control board 9080. For example, a more detailed effect control command related to the jackpot game and an effect control command indicating the game state (for example, an effect control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 9031 to the effect control board 9080.

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the first special symbol process process (step S9026A) executed by the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056) mounted on the main board 9031. As described above, in the first special symbol process process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 908a and the special variable winning ball device 9020 is executed.

When the CPU 9056 performs the first special symbol process process, the first start opening switch 9013a for detecting that the game ball has won a prize in the first start winning opening 9013 provided on the game board 906 is turned on. Then, that is, if a start winning prize is generated in which the game ball wins the first starting winning opening 9013 (step S90311), the first starting opening switch passing process is executed (step S90312). After that, the CPU 9056 performs any of steps S90300 to S90307 according to the internal state (specifically, the value of the first special symbol process flag).

The processes of steps S90300 to S90307 are as follows.
First special symbol normal process (step S90300): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 0. When the game control microcomputer 90560 is in a state where the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the storage number of the numerical data stored in the hold storage number buffer (total hold storage number) is confirmed. The number of numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total hold storage counter. Further, if the count value of the total pending storage counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol is a big hit. If it is a big hit, set the first big hit flag. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S90301 (1 in this example). The first jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

First variation pattern setting process (step S90301): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 1. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of the variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) is defined as the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol. Decide to do. In addition, a fluctuation time timer that measures the fluctuation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90302 (2 in this example).

First display result designation command transmission process (step S90302): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 2. Control is performed to send a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90303 (3 in this example).

First special symbol changing process (step S90303): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 3. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the first fluctuation pattern setting process elapses (the fluctuation time timer set in step S90301 times out, that is, the value of the fluctuation time timer becomes 0), the effect control microcomputer 90200 is notified. Controls the transmission of the symbol confirmation specification command, and updates the internal state (first special symbol process flag) to the value corresponding to step S90304 (4 in this example). The effect control microcomputer 90200 controls the effect display device 909 to stop the decorative symbol when the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 90560 is received.

First special symbol stop process (step S90304): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 4. When the first jackpot flag is set, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90305 (5 in this example). If the first jackpot flag is not set, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90300 (0 in this example). In this embodiment, the special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process is displayed as the special symbol based on the value of the special symbol process flag being 4. It is set in the output buffer for setting control data, and in the display control process of step S9022, the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting content of the output buffer.

First big winning opening pre-opening process (step S90305): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 5. In the first large winning opening opening preprocessing, the special variable winning ball device 9020 is controlled to be opened. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special variable winning ball device 9020) and the like are initialized, and the solenoid 9021 is driven to open the large winning opening. In addition, the execution time of the process during opening of the first special winning opening is set by the timer, and the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90306 (6 in this example). The first big winning opening pre-opening process is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the first big winning opening pre-opening process is also a process for starting a big hit game.

First Grand Prize Opening Opening Process (Step S90306): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 6. The control of transmitting the effect control command of the round display during the big hit game state to the effect control microcomputer 90200, the processing of confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 9020, and the like are performed. Further, when a game ball wins a prize in the large prize opening and the game ball is detected by the first count switch 9023a, the control is performed to transmit the large winning opening winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200. If the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 9020 is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90305 (5 in this example). To do. When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90307 (7 in this example).

First jackpot end process (step S90307): Executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed so that the effect control microcomputer 90200 performs display control for notifying the player that the jackpot game state has ended. In addition, a process of setting a flag indicating the game state (for example, a probability change flag, a first KT flag, and a second KT flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90300 (0 in this example).

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the second special symbol process process (step S9026B) executed by the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056) mounted on the main board 9031. As described above, in the second special symbol process process, a process for controlling the second special symbol display 908b, the special variable winning ball device 9020, and the special variable winning ball device 9022 is executed.

When the CPU 9056 performs the second special symbol process process, the second start opening switch 9014a for detecting that the game ball has won a prize in the second start winning opening 9014 provided on the game board 906 is turned on. Then, that is, if a start winning prize is generated in which the game ball wins the second starting winning opening 9014 (step S90321), the second starting opening switch passing process is executed (step S90322). If the "first" of the first start port switch passing process shown in FIG. 39 is read as "second", the second starting port switch passing process will be explained. After that, the CPU 9056 performs any of steps S90350 to S90360 according to the internal state (specifically, the value of the second special symbol process flag).

The processes of steps S90350 to S90360 are as follows.
Second special symbol normal process (step S90350): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 0. When the game control microcomputer 90560 is in a state where the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the storage number of the numerical data stored in the hold storage number buffer (total hold storage number) is confirmed. The number of numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total hold storage counter. Further, if the count value of the total pending storage counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol is a big hit. If it is a big hit, set the second big hit flag. On the other hand, if it is not a big hit, a small hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S90351 (1 in this example). The second jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. In addition, the small hit flag is reset when the small hit game ends.

Second variation pattern setting process (step S90351): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 1. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of the variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) is defined as the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol. Decide to do. In addition, a fluctuation time timer that measures the fluctuation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90352 (2 in this example).

Second display result designation command transmission process (step S90352): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 2. Control is performed to send a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90353 (3 in this example).

Second special symbol changing process (step S90353): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 3. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the second fluctuation pattern setting process elapses (the fluctuation time timer set in step S90351 times out, that is, the value of the fluctuation time timer becomes 0), the effect control microcomputer 90200 is notified. Control is performed to send the symbol confirmation designation command, and the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90354 (4 in this example). The effect control microcomputer 90200 controls the effect display device 909 to stop the decorative symbol when the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 90560 is received.

Second special symbol stop process (step S90354): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 4. When the second jackpot flag is set, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90355 (5 in this example). When the small hit flag is set, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90358 (8 in this example). When neither the second big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set (when forced to be missed), the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is set to the value corresponding to step S90350 (0 in this example). Update. In this embodiment, based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag is 4, as will be described later, special symbol display control for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data, and in the display control process of step S9022, the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting content of the output buffer.

Second big winning opening pre-opening process (step S90355): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 5. In the second large winning opening opening preprocessing, the special variable winning ball device 9020 is controlled to be opened. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special variable winning ball device 9020) and the like are initialized, and the solenoid 9021 is driven to open the large winning opening. Further, the execution time of the process during opening of the second special winning opening is set by the timer, and the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90356 (6 in this example). The second big winning opening pre-opening process is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the second big winning opening pre-opening process is also a process for starting a big hit game.

Second Grand Prize Opening Opening Process (Step S90356): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 6. The control of transmitting the effect control command of the round display during the big hit game state to the effect control microcomputer 90200, the processing of confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 9020, and the like are performed. Further, when a game ball wins a prize in the large prize opening and the game ball is detected by the first count switch 9023a, the control is performed to transmit the large winning opening winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200. If the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 9020 is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90355 (5 in this example). To do. When all the rounds are completed, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90357 (7 in this example).

Second jackpot end process (step S90357): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed so that the effect control microcomputer 90200 performs display control for notifying the player that the jackpot game state has ended. In addition, a process of setting a flag indicating the game state (for example, a probability change flag, a first KT flag, and a second KT flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90350 (0 in this example).

Second small hit release pre-processing (step S90358): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 8. In the second small hit opening pre-processing, the special variable winning ball device 9022 is controlled to be opened. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special winning opening 9024) and the like are initialized, and the solenoid 90106 is driven to control the special variable winning ball device 9022 to open. Further, the execution time of the process during the opening of the second small hit is set by the timer, and the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90359 (9 in this example). The second small hit opening pre-processing is also a process for starting the small hit game.

Second small hit opening process (step S90359): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 9. A process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special variable winning ball device 9022 is performed. In this embodiment, the closing condition is satisfied when the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 9022 is 0.8 seconds (see FIG. 35). Further, when a game ball wins a prize in the special winning opening and the second count switch 9025a detects the game ball, the control is performed to transmit a special winning opening winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90200. When the closing condition is satisfied, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S90360 (10 (decimal number) in this example).

Second small hit end process (step S90360): Executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed so that the effect control microcomputer 90200 performs display control for notifying the player that the small hit game state has ended. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90300 (0 in this example).

Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an effect control main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 90200 (specifically, the effect control CPU 90201) mounted on the effect control board 9080. The effect control CPU 90201 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main process, first, the initialization process for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, initializing the timer for determining the activation interval of the effect control, and the like is performed (step S90701A). After that, the effect control CPU 90201 shifts to the loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S90702A). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 90201 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 90201 clears the flag (step S90703) and executes the following effect control process.

In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 90201 first analyzes the received effect control command and sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S90704). Next, the effect control CPU 90201 performs the first decorative symbol process process (step S90705A). In the first decorative symbol process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (first effect control process flag) is selected from each process according to the control state, and the display control of the first variable display unit 909a is executed. .. In addition, the second decorative symbol process process is performed (step S90705B). In the second decorative symbol process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (second effect control process flag) is selected from each process according to the control state, and the display control of the second variable display unit 909b is executed. .. Further, the effect symbol process process for controlling the display state of the effect symbol display unit 909c is executed (step S90706). In addition, a hold storage display control process for controlling the display state of the symbol hold storage display unit 9018c is executed (step S90707). Further, a random number update process for updating the counter value of the counter for generating a random number such as a random number for determining the advance notice is executed (step S90708). After that, the process proceeds to step S90702A.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the effect control process process (S90706) in the effect control main process shown in FIG. 40. In the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 90201 performs any process from S90800 to S90810 according to the value of the effect control process flag after performing the process of S90700. In each process, the following processes are executed.

Look-ahead processing (S90700): This is a process of storing the hold storage information (hold information) corresponding to the hold storage information possessed by the game control microcomputer 90560, and making the hold storage information usable for the look-ahead effect. The look-ahead effect is the content of the change display of the special symbol based on the hold information by pre-reading the hold memory information before the turn of the change display (symbol change) of the special symbol based on the hold memory information arrives. It is a production technique such as determining what will happen to the variable display of the special symbol in the future and giving a notice at a stage before that. For example, when it is shown that the hold storage information is a small hit or a big hit, a notice effect (see FIG. 42) called a hold continuous notification effect can be executed as a look-ahead effect. In the following, the hold storage information targeted for the look-ahead effect will be referred to as “target hold storage information”. Further, after the look-ahead processing, the jackpot-related processing (S90701) and the rush hour processing (S90702) are executed, and the details will be described later.

Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (S90800): It is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 90560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the fluctuation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the variation pattern command is received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (S90801).

Effect symbol variation start processing (S98001): Control is performed so that the effect at the time of variation, which is an effect corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol, is started. Corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern command, the effect pattern of the effect during fluctuation is selected, and the time of the effect time timer that measures the effect time to be executed is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the processing during the effect during fluctuation (S90802).

Processing during effect symbol change (S90802): Controls the switching timing of each state constituting the effect pattern, and monitors whether or not the effect time measured by the effect time timer has expired. Then, the value of the effect control process flag corresponds to the effect stop process (S90803) at the time of fluctuation in order to end the effect at the time of fluctuation based on the end of the effect time or the reception of the symbol confirmation designation command. Update to value.

Effect symbol fluctuation stop processing (S90803): Controls to stop the effect during fluctuation and display the effect result corresponding to the variation display result (stop symbol) of the special symbol. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (S90804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S90800).

Big hit display process (S90804): When a big hit occurs, display control such as control for performing a fanfare effect as an effect such as a big hit display for notifying the effect display device 909 of the occurrence of a big hit is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the processing during the round (S90805).

Round processing (S90805): Display control during a big hit round is performed. Then, when the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round is not completed, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the round post-processing (S90806). If the final round is completed, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (S90807).

Round post-processing (S90806): Display control between jackpot rounds is performed. Then, when the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the processing during the round (S90805).

Big hit end effect processing (S90807): The effect display device 909 performs display control to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S90800).

Small hit display process (S90808): When a small hit occurs, display control such as control for performing a fanfare effect as an effect such as a small hit display for notifying the effect display device 909 of the occurrence of a small hit is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit opening process (S90809).

Small hit opening process (S90809): In the small hit, various effect controls are performed while the special variable winning ball device 9022 is open. For example, in the small hit game state, various effects are executed when the game ball is detected by the second count switch 9025a in the special winning opening 9024. Then, when the special variable winning ball device 9022 is closed, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect process (S90810).

Small hit end effect processing (S90810): The effect display device 909 performs an effect control to notify the player that the small hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S90800).

In the effect control process process, the display state of the effect display device 909 is controlled by each of the above processes, the effect at the time of variation corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is started, and the effect result corresponding to the variable display result of the special symbol is obtained. Is displayed. The effect control CPU 90201 recognizes the specified variation pattern and the display result for the variation display executed based on the received variation pattern command and the display result specification command, and produces the effect at the time of variation. Determine the result.

[Direction during big hit]
Next, the effect during the jackpot executed in this embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, when the jackpot display result is derived, the jackpot gaming state is controlled to be advantageous to the player. Then, during the big hit game state (also referred to as the big hit state or the big hit state), various effects are executed.

[Holding continuous production]
For example, there is a pending continuous production as a production during a big hit. The game control microcomputer 90560 has a random value for determining a big hit and a random value for determining a big hit type when a game ball enters a starting winning area such as the first starting winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9014. , And a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern is extracted. Then, if the start condition that can start the variable display such as the condition that the variable display is not being executed or the condition that the big hit is not being executed is satisfied at the time of the start winning, the variable display is executed based on the extracted random number value.

On the other hand, for the variable display in which the start condition is not yet satisfied even though the game ball has entered the start winning area, the RAM 9055 stores the information indicating the extracted random number value at the time of the start winning. Then, at the time of the start winning, the game control microcomputer 90560 transmits a look-ahead result notification command capable of specifying information indicating whether or not to make a big hit and information indicating a fluctuation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 90200. .. The hold storage is read from the oldest one each time the start condition of the variable display is satisfied, and the variable display is executed based on the read information of the hold storage.

By receiving such a look-ahead result notification command, the effect control microcomputer 90200 becomes a big hit or a specific fluctuation pattern type until the fluctuation display which becomes a big hit or a specific fluctuation pattern type is executed. It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect that suggests or gives a notice.

Such a look-ahead effect may be executed between the time of the first big hit state and the variable display which becomes the later big hit state. In this embodiment, the look-ahead effect executed in the previous jackpot state is referred to as a hold continuous effect. When there is a hold memory that is determined to be the next big hit state in the big hit state (so-called hold continuous case), the hold continuous effect of the success pattern is executed until the next big hit state. In addition, a pending continuous production of a failure pattern may be executed. Then, in the pending continuous production of the success pattern, a premium video that cannot be seen with a normal jackpot is played after that.

In addition, the hold memory that becomes the small hit state may be stored between the hold memory determined from the big hit state to the next big hit state. A case where there is such a hold continuous effect and a hold memory controlled to a small hit state during the hold continuous effect will be described with reference to FIG. 42.

FIG. 42 is an effect drawing showing an effect executed during the jackpot. The production during the big hit is performed in the order of FIGS. 42 (a) to 42 (f). FIG. 42A shows the screen of the effect display device 909 at the start of the big hit. When the game state is switched to the big hit state and the first round game is started, the image is switched to the image during the big hit. An image showing the current number of rounds is displayed on the upper right of the screen of the effect display device 909, and a numerical symbol indicating which effect symbol has started the big hit is shown on the lower right of the screen. Further, in the upper left of the screen, the total winning image 90194 shows the winning balls obtained by winning the big hit. As shown in FIG. 42 (a), at the start of the big hit, the total acquired image 90194 of "0 GET" indicating that the acquired number is 0 is displayed.

When the round progresses from the state shown in FIG. 42A and reaches 5R, the effect of the pending ream is executed. When the hold continuous effect is successful, the hold continuous image 90195 composed of the characters "ream chan" indicating the hold continuous effect as shown in FIG. 42B is displayed. In addition, the jackpot video is switched from a normal jackpot video to a premium video that can only be seen during the hold ream. At this time, the total acquired image 90194 of "450 GET" indicating that the acquired number is 450 is displayed. After that, the screen of FIG. 42 (c) is displayed at the 16th round, which is the first round of the big hit. As shown in FIG. 42 (c), a premium image is played, and a total acquired image 90194 of "1550 GET" indicating that the number of acquired images is 1550 is displayed.

When the information about the small hit is stored in the hold storage between the first big hit and the second big hit, the screen as shown in FIG. 42 (d) is displayed. In FIG. 42 (d), the characters “+100” indicating that 100 game balls have been acquired by winning a game ball in the special winning opening 9024 of the special variable winning ball device 9022 in one small hit winning. The first acquired image 90196 to be displayed is displayed. The first acquired image 90196 is displayed in the center of the screen with a rainbow-colored background. Such an effect of a small hit between large hits is also referred to as an acquisition notification effect. In addition, in the lower right corner of the screen, the numbers "123", which is a symbol indicating the small hit winning, are displayed in different numbers. Further, in the upper right corner of the screen, the characters "17R" indicating that this one small hit winning is counted as one round are displayed. Further, in the upper left of the screen, a total acquisition image 90194 of "1600 GET" showing the total number of acquisitions with the game ball acquired by the first big hit is displayed. Then, in FIG. 42 (d), a series of premium images are continuously played from FIG. 42 (c).

Next, the state when the second big hit starts after the small hit state ends will be described with reference to FIG. 42 (e). At the start of the second big hit, in the upper right corner of the screen, after counting the number of rounds of the first big hit and the small hit as one round, the total of the start of the next big hit of "18R" The characters are displayed. Further, at the lower right of the screen, the symbol "7" indicating the current jackpot symbol is displayed. Further, in the upper left of the screen, a total acquisition image 90194 of "1750 GET" indicating the total acquisition number of game balls is displayed. At this time as well, a series of premium videos will continue to be played.

At the end of the second big hit, the screen is as shown in FIG. 42 (f). In the upper right corner of the screen, the characters "33R", which is the sum of the number of rounds of the first big hit and the number of rounds of the next big hit after counting as one round, are displayed. Further, at the lower right of the screen, the symbol "7" indicating the current jackpot symbol is displayed. Further, in the upper left of the screen, a total acquired image 90194 of "3200 GET" indicating the total acquired number of game balls is displayed. At this time as well, a series of premium videos will continue to be played.

As shown in FIG. 42, a premium video with a hold effect is played as a series of videos from the jackpot state to the next jackpot state. Such a premier video also flows when the small hit state is controlled during a specific period from the big hit state to the start of the next big hit state. By doing so, since the production by the image is a series, it is possible to give the impression that the big hit continues even if the game state changes. Therefore, when there is a hold memory that is determined to be controlled to a small hit state different from the big hit state in the period from the big hit state to the next big hit state, the interest of the game can be improved.

After the end of the first big hit, the deviation fluctuation may be included until the next big hit, but even in this case, the premium video continues to flow.

[Direction during rush]
Next, the production during the rush will be described. In this embodiment, if the high probability / first KT state or the high probability / second KT state is reached after the end of the big hit game state, the rush state is entered. In the rush state, in the high probability / first KT state, it is not possible to expect the acquisition of balls by small hits. On the other hand, in the rush state of the high probability / second KT state, a small hit is likely to occur, and a prize ball based on a game ball winning a prize in the special winning opening 9024 due to the generated small hit is added at any time. Therefore, during the rush state of the probability / second KT state, the number of balls to be output is likely to increase as compared with other game states.

FIG. 43 is an effect drawing showing an effect executed during the rush. When the rush state is reached after the end of the jackpot game state, the screen during the rush is displayed as shown in FIG. 43 (a). As shown in FIG. 43A, in the center of the screen of the effect display device 909, a downward arrow indicates that the variable display is currently executed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 9091, 9092, and 9093. Indicated by. Further, in the upper right corner of the screen, a total acquired image 90194 showing the total number of the acquired balls acquired by the big hit and the balls during the rush is displayed. Further, on the right side of the screen, the characters "RUSH" indicating that the rush state is currently in progress are displayed. Further, at the lower left of the screen, a hold display H for displaying the generated hold storage information is displayed corresponding to the number of hold storage information.

From the state of FIG. 43 (a), when the current fluctuation is a fluctuation that results in a small hit display result, as shown in FIG. 43 (b), the display result is controlled to the small hit state. A combination of even-numbered symbols of "222" is displayed. The white even-numbered symbols in FIG. 43 (b) are blue. Further, in the lower right corner of the screen, the ball output during the small hit is displayed as the second acquired image 90197 with the characters "+100".

As shown in FIG. 43 (b), when a small hit state is reached in the rush state, the special variable winning ball device 9022 is displayed with the second acquired image 90197 notifying that the game ball has won a prize. In this way, since it is clearly notified that the game ball has been acquired, it is easy to understand that the small hit state has been controlled, and it is possible to give momentum to the production. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest when the small hit state is controlled.

Further, from the state of FIG. 43A, when the current fluctuation is a fluctuation that results in a small hit display result, and there is a hold storage controlled to the small hit state in the hold storage, FIG. The display screen is as shown in 43 (c). In FIG. 43 (c), a combination of even-numbered symbols of “222” indicating that the small hit state is controlled as a display result is displayed. Up to this point, it is the same as in FIG. 43 (b). However, at the lower right of the screen, the balls acquired during the small hit are displayed as the third acquired image 90198 of the characters "GET".

As shown in FIGS. 43 (b) and 43 (c), in the small hit state, the second acquired image 90197 when there is no hold memory determined to be controlled in the small hit state in the hold, and in the hold. It is displayed in a different manner from the third acquired image 90198 when there is a hold memory determined to be controlled in the small hit state. In this way, when there is a hold memory determined to be controlled in the small hit state (when the hold information is stored), the player can be given a special feeling. Therefore, it is possible to have expectations for the future gaming state.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 42 (d), 43 (b), and (c), the first acquired image 90196 when the small hit state is controlled during the period from the big hit state to the next big hit state, and the first acquired image 90196 thereof. The display mode of the acquired image is different from that of the second acquired image 90197 and the third acquired image 90198 in the period other than the above. In this way, the first acquired image 90196 due to the small hit state during the hold continuous production in which the most game balls can be acquired in these states is larger in the center of the screen than the acquired images in the other states. It is also displayed in rainbow colors. This makes it possible to give a special feeling when the small hit state between the big hits is controlled.

Next, when the probability variation jackpot is changed from the state shown in FIG. 43 (a) (high probability / first KT state or high probability / second KT state), the screen as shown in FIG. 43 (d) is displayed. As shown in FIG. 43 (d), a combination of odd-numbered symbols of "777" indicating that the probability variation jackpot state is controlled as a display result is displayed. The filled odd-numbered symbol in FIG. 43 (d) is red. After that, as shown in FIG. 43 (e), the probability variation jackpot is started, and the image corresponding to the probability variation jackpot is played. The probability variation big hit symbol may be different between the high probability / first KT state in which the ball output by the small hit cannot be expected and the high probability / second KT state in which the ball output by the small hit can be expected. For example, when it is in the high probability / first KT state, it is displayed with an odd number of "333", and when it is in the high probability / second KT state, it is displayed as "777" to give a special feeling. Further, the color of the numbers may be different between the "3" symbol and the "7" symbol.

Further, when the normal jackpot is obtained from the state of FIG. 43 (a) (low probability / first KT state), as shown in FIG. 43 (f), the symbol of "END" indicating the end of the rush state is displayed. Is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 43 (g), the normal jackpot is started, and the image corresponding to the normal jackpot is played. Further, after the end of the normal jackpot, when the fluctuation of the low probability / first KT state 100 times is completed, the non-KT state is controlled.

As shown in FIG. 43, the display result includes a small hit display result composed of a combination of blue symbols shown in FIG. 43 (b) and a probability variation jackpot composed of a combination of red symbols shown in FIG. 43 (d). The display result and is included. Then, when the small hit display result is derived and displayed, it is controlled to the small hit state, and when the probability variation big hit display result is derived and displayed, it is controlled to the big hit state. In this way, by making the display result different depending on whether it is the small hit display result or the big hit display result, the controlled game state can be shown in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, when the small hit state is controlled in the rush state in which a series of premium images are not flowing, the small hit display result composed of the combination of the blue symbols shown in FIG. 43 (b) is derived and displayed, and FIG. 42 ( When the small hit state is controlled during the rush state after the series of premium images shown in d) is played, it is controlled so that the loose eyes are displayed at the lower right of the screen. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the target of the premium video from being misunderstood that it is controlled to a small hit state, and to reduce the interest of the game.

In addition, in FIG. 43 (g), a challenge effect in which the rush state continues in the middle of the image corresponding to the normal big hit may be executed. The challenge production is a production that pretends to be a normal jackpot and actually shows that it was a probabilistic jackpot in which the rush state continues. Specifically, after issuing the "END" symbol indicating the end of the rush state, the push button is pressed, and if the wall on the screen is opened by the push button operation, the rush state continues with a successful challenge. If the wall on the screen does not open even if the push button is operated, the end of the rush state is confirmed by the failure of the challenge.

[Big hit related processing]
Next, the jackpot-related processing executed during the jackpot will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the jackpot related processing. The jackpot-related processing is executed in the effect control process process executed by the effect control microcomputer 90200 (specifically, the effect control CPU 90201). In the jackpot-related processing, the effect control CPU 90201 executes a process related to the setting of the effect as shown in FIG. 42 on the effect display device 909. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given based on the flowchart.

In the jackpot-related processing, first, the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not it is the start of the jackpot (S90500). When the effect control CPU 90201 determines that it is the start of a big hit (Y in S90500), it confirms the inside of the hold storage buffer (S90501) and shifts to S90502. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the start of the big hit (N in S90500), the effect control CPU 90201 ends the process.

In S90502, it is determined whether or not there is a hold memory of the jackpot. The effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not to execute the hold continuous effect when it is determined that there is a hold memory of the big hit (Y in S90502), and sets it as a success pattern when executing the hold continuous effect (Y). S90503) and S90504.

In S90504, the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not there is a hold memory for the small hit before the next big hit. When the effect control CPU 90201 determines that there is a small hit hold memory before the next big hit (Y in S90504), the effect control CPU 90201 sets the symbol and the acquisition notification effect at the time of the small hit between big hits (S90505), and a series of series. The jackpot video is set to be played (S90506). Next, the effect control CPU 90201 sets other effects (S90507) and ends the process.

In S90504, when it is determined that there is no hold memory for the small hit by the next big hit (N in S90504), the effect control CPU 90201 is set to play a series of big hit images without performing the processing of S90505. (S90506). Next, the effect control CPU 90201 sets other effects (S90507) and ends the process. Here, in S90506, when there is a small hit between the big hits, in addition to the premium image as shown in FIG. 42, an image related to the acquisition notification effect of the small hit is set to be displayed.

In S90502, when the effect control CPU 90201 determines that there is no hold memory of the jackpot (N in S90502), it determines whether or not to execute the hold continuous effect, and when the hold continuous effect is executed, it becomes a failure pattern. Set (S90508). Next, the effect control CPU 90201 is set so that the normal jackpot video, which is not the premium video, ends when the jackpot ends (S90509). Then, other effects are set (S90507), and the process ends.

In addition, instead of providing a success pattern and a failure pattern as the hold continuous effect, the hold continuous effect may be executed only when there is a hold memory of a big hit in S90502. In addition, the hold continuous production may be one in which a premium video is played from the start of the big hit, and it is not necessary to execute a success or failure production in the middle of the round.

Further, in S90505, when setting the symbol at the time of the big hit and the small hit and the acquisition notification effect, a flag for executing the acquisition notification effect may be set. Then, the presence or absence of the flag may be confirmed at the start of the small hit fluctuation, and the acquisition notification effect may be executed.

[Rush hour processing]
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing rush processing. The rush hour processing is executed in the effect control process process executed by the effect control microcomputer 90200 (specifically, the effect control CPU 90201). In the rush hour processing, the jackpot symbol and the acquisition notification effect are determined according to the result of the variable display executed during the rush hour. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given based on the flowchart.

In the rush hour processing, first, the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in the rush hour (S90520). When it is determined that the current gaming state is in the rush (Y in S90520), the effect control CPU 90201 shifts to S90521. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current gaming state is not in the rush (N in S90520), the effect control CPU 90201 sets other effects (S90525) and ends the process.

In S90521, the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not the current fluctuation is a big hit. When the effect control CPU 90201 determines that the current fluctuation is not a big hit (N in S90521), it determines whether or not the current fluctuation is a small hit (S90522), and when it is a small hit (S90522). In S90522, the process proceeds to Y) and S90523. In S90522, when it is determined that the fluctuation this time is not a small hit (N in S90522), the effect control CPU 90201 sets other effects (S90525) and ends the process. In S90523, the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not there is a small hit hold memory in the hold memory (S90523). Then, when the effect control CPU 90201 determines that there is a small hit hold memory in the hold memory (Y in S90523), it sets an acquisition notification effect when there is a small hit hold (S90529), and other effects. Is set (S90525), and the process ends. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 90201 determines that there is no small hit hold memory in the hold memory (N in S90523), the effect control CPU 90201 sets an acquisition notification effect when there is no small hit hold (S90524), and other effects. Is set (S90525), and the process ends.

In S90521, when the effect control CPU 90201 determines that the current fluctuation is a big hit (Y in S90521), it determines whether or not it is a probabilistic big hit (S90526). When the effect control CPU 90201 determines that the probability variation jackpot is (Y in S90526), the effect control CPU 90201 sets the symbol at the time of the probability variation jackpot (S90527), sets other effects (S90525), and ends the process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the effect control CPU 90201 is not a probability variation jackpot (N in S90526), the pattern at the time of a normal jackpot is set (S90528), other effects are set (S90525), and the process is terminated. The effect during rush hour as shown in FIG. 43 is determined by the effect content set in the rush hour process.

[Modification example of big hit production]
FIG. 46 is a timing chart showing the processing during the jackpot in the modified example. In the above embodiment, an example in which the variable winning ball device 9015 and the special variable winning ball device 9022 are arranged side by side has been described. However, the various processes described above may be executed by one variable winning ball device 9015 without providing the special variable winning ball device 9022.

For example, when a so-called attacker, which is one variable winning ball device 9015, is used, such an attacker repeatedly opens and closes from 1R to 16R in the first jackpot section. Then, after the variable section after the end of the big hit is completed, the attacker shifts to the small hit section in which the opening and closing of the short opening is repeated 5 times by being controlled to the small hit state. The small hit section is indicated as 17R on the screen of the effect display device 909. Then, after the variable section after the end of the small hit section is completed, the attacker repeatedly opens and closes from 1R to 16R in the second big hit section by being controlled to the big hit state again. The second jackpot section is displayed as 18R to 33R on the screen of the effect display device 909. From the first big hit section to the end of the second big hit section including the small hit section, a series of big hit images are played. As shown in FIG. 42, as for the big hit video, the premium video may be played as a trigger of the hold continuous production, or the premium video may be played from the start of the first big hit.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, the processing during the jackpot effect in the second embodiment will be described. In the second embodiment, the case where the music can be selected during the big hit will be described. In the second embodiment, a selection effect of selecting one of a plurality of songs from a plurality of songs is executed based on the operation of the player during the jackpot. In the second embodiment, it is assumed that the pachinko gaming machine 901 is provided with a stick controller and a push button as operating means (not shown). For example, the stick controller may be attached to a predetermined position of the member forming the surplus ball tray 904, and the push button may be attached to the upper surface of the member forming the ball hitting plate 903. When these operating means are operated, the movement of the player is detected by the sensor provided inside, the detection signal is transmitted to the effect control board 9080, and the effect based on the operation is executed. As the selection effect, one of a plurality of types of images may be selected during the jackpot, or one of the modes may be selected from a plurality of types of modes.

FIG. 47 is an effect drawing showing an effect executed during the jackpot. The production during the big hit will be described with reference to FIG. 47. As shown in FIG. 47 (a), the music selection screen is displayed at the start of the big hit. The music selection screen at the start of this big hit is displayed regardless of the operation of the player. In the area on the left side of the display screen of the effect display device 909, items corresponding to the songs A to D are displayed. The first selection image 90170 corresponding to the music A, the second selection image 90171 corresponding to the music B, the third selection image 90172 corresponding to the music C, and the fourth selection image 90173 corresponding to the music D are from above. They are displayed side by side in order. Further, around the first selected image 90170, it is indicated by a bordered display that an item corresponding to the image is selected.

The video area 90175 is displayed on the right side of the first-selected images 90170 to 90173. Images corresponding to the songs A to D flow in the image area 90175. At the start of the jackpot, with the first-selected image 90170 selected, a video corresponding to the music A flows in the video area 90175 from a specific unit (for example, a chorus portion where the music is heard). Further, at the start of the jackpot, the music corresponding to the first selected music A is played from the specific portion (chorus portion). Here, the specific part may be a part other than the chorus part, which is the place where the music is heard. For example, it may be the main part of the music, which is the exciting part of the music but different from the chorus part. The video or sound corresponding to the music may be reproduced from the beginning of the music.

Further, on the lower left side of the screen of the effect display device 909, a selection operation image 90176 that prompts a music selection operation imitating a stick controller is displayed. Further, in the center of the lower part of the screen, a decision image 90177 that prompts a music decision operation imitating a push button is displayed. Further, on the right side of the lower part of the screen, an image of "7" indicating which symbol the current jackpot is based on is displayed. In addition, the current number of rounds is displayed on the upper left side of the screen, and an image of a right-handed instruction prompting the player to play a game aiming at the area on the right side is displayed on the upper right side of the screen.

The state when the stick controller is operated from the state of FIG. 47 (a) and the item corresponding to the music of B is selected will be described with reference to FIG. 47 (b). When the stick controller is operated from the state of FIG. 47A and the item corresponding to the music of B is selected, the second selection image 90171 is displayed in a bordered state. Further, the video corresponding to the music B flows from the specific portion (chorus portion) to the video area 90175, and the music corresponding to the music B is reproduced from the specific portion (chorus portion).

The case where the music A is determined from the state of FIG. 47 (b) will be described with reference to FIG. 47 (c). When the music A is determined in the music selection at the start of the big hit, the video corresponding to the music A is played from the beginning in the video area 90175 moved to the center of the screen as the music determination screen at the start of the big hit. Also, the music A is played from the beginning. By the determination operation, the display of the selection operation image 90176 and the determination image 90177 is erased. Here, the music selection operation at the start of the big hit can be performed during the period from the start of the first round to the end of the second round. If neither the selection operation nor the determination operation is performed by the end of the second round, the video and sound corresponding to the initially set music A will be played from the end of the second round. Further, when only the selection operation is executed and the two rounds are completed without the determination operation being executed, the video and sound of the music corresponding to the item selected by the selection operation are output.

From the state of FIG. 47 (c), at the start of the third round, as shown in FIG. 47 (d), the video corresponding to the music A is continuously played in the video area 90175 in the center of the screen, and the sound corresponding to the music A is output. Will be done. At the start of the third round, the selection operation image 90176 is displayed again at the bottom of the screen. Then, when the player operates the stick controller, the music selection screen is displayed again as shown in FIG. 47 (e). In this way, the second music selection screen is displayed based on the operation of the player. In the first music selection screen, the valid period of the operation is set from the start of the first round to the end of the second round, and in the second music selection screen, the valid period of the operation is from the start of the third round to the final. It is set up to a round (16 rounds). It should be noted that these periods may be set in any way, the selectable period may be three or more times, and the selection operation may not be performed during any of the rounds.

In the music selection screen of FIG. 47 (e), as compared with the music selection screen at the start of the big hit in FIG. 47 (a), the character of the first selection image 90170 corresponding to the item of music A is "A". It has been changed from the indicated character to the "back" character. Also, the currently selected "back" first-selected image 90170 is bordered and displayed. Further, from the state of FIG. 47 (d), the video and sound corresponding to the music A are continuously flowing. In addition, the determined image 90177 is newly displayed. From such a state, when the stick controller is operated and the item corresponding to the music of B is selected, the second selection image 90171 is displayed in a bordered state as shown in FIG. 47 (f). Further, the video corresponding to the music B flows in the video area 90175 from the chorus portion. However, even if such a selection operation is performed, the sound of the music A is still output.

When the music A is selected from the state of FIG. 47 (f), the result is as shown in FIG. 47 (g). In FIG. 47 (g), since the item of the music A corresponding to the first selection image 90170 indicated by “return” in FIG. 47 (f) is selected, the video corresponding to A is continuously reproduced in the video area 90175. .. In addition, the sound of the music A is continuously played as it is. On the other hand, when the music B is selected from the state of FIG. 47 (f), the result is as shown in FIG. 47 (h). In FIG. 47 (h), since the item of the music B corresponding to the second selection image 90171 shown by “B” in FIG. 47 (f) is selected, the video corresponding to B is reproduced from the beginning in the video area 90175. .. Also, the sound of music B is reproduced from the beginning.

As shown in FIG. 47 (a), at the start of the big hit, items corresponding to a plurality of types of music are displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 47 (b), the player can change the item selected by the selection operation. In addition, by the selection operation, the music and the video corresponding to the selected item are output. Then, as shown in FIG. 47 (e), the item corresponding to the music A can be displayed by "returning" even when the item corresponding to the music A is being executed. In such a situation, as shown in FIG. 47 (g), when the item corresponding to the music A is selected again, the sound of the music A is continuously played as it is. Further, as shown in FIG. 47 (h), when an item corresponding to the music B different from the music A is selected, the music B is played from the beginning.

In this way, it is possible to confirm what is in the other selection items while playing the music corresponding to the music A. Then, even if the music A is re-determined, the music A is not played from the beginning and continues to flow from the middle. Therefore, even if the selected music is selected again, the interest of the game is reduced. Can be prevented. More specifically, when a song that has already been selected is selected again, it may be annoying if the song is played from the beginning, which may reduce the interest. However, by the above processing, even when the selected music is selected again, it is possible to prevent the music from being played from the beginning, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 47, the selection effect of selecting an item can be executed during the jackpot state. Therefore, even when the selected song is selected again, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game during the big hit state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 47 (a), the music selection effect for selecting a musical piece includes a selection effect at the start of a round executed regardless of the player's operation at the start of a big hit and as shown in FIG. 47 (d). Includes a selection effect that is executed based on the player's operation when the three rounds are disclosed. In this way, since there are a plurality of execution timings of the selection effect in the jackpot state, the player's preference such as selecting a song in the second selection effect without selecting a song in the first selection effect is met. The selection effect can be executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 47, the first selection effect at the start of the round is set from the start of the first round to the end of the second round, and the second selection effect at the start of the third round is at the start of the third round. It is set from to the final round. Therefore, by prolonging the executable period of the second selection effect to be executed based on the player's operation, it is possible to deal with various types of players such as the fact that the first selection operation could not be performed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 47, in a music piece that can be played back, as shown in FIGS. 47 (a) and 47 (b), in the selection effect at the start of the round, items are set based on the operation of the player. When changed, the music to be played changes according to the change of the item. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 47 (e) and 47 (f), in the selection effect at the start of the third round, even if the item is changed based on the operation of the player, the music to be played is It does not change. In this way, since the music is not frequently switched, it is possible to prevent the game from being less interesting due to the frequent switching of the music.

Further, as shown in FIG. 47 (e), in the selection effect at the start of the third round, the display of the items corresponding to the currently executed music is different from the display of “A” in the selection effect at the start of the round. Display with "Back". In this way, it is possible to show the player in an easy-to-understand manner which song is currently playing.

It should be noted that the pending continuous effect may be executed for the above-mentioned selection effect. For example, it is assumed that the hold continuous production can be executed at any of a plurality of timings in the round. Then, as one of the plurality of timings, the hold continuous effect may be executed at the timing when any one of the plurality of items at the start of the round is selected. In this way, the player can be surprised at the first selection effect of selecting the music at the start of the big hit, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, if there is no determination operation of the player until the end of the second round, the hold continuous production may be executed at the timing when the effect control microcomputer 90200 receives the command at the end of the second round. .. Further, instead of the selection effect at the start of the big hit, the hold continuous effect may be executed at the timing operated by the player in the second selection effect at the start of the third round. If the player does not perform the selection operation from the selection effect at the start of the third round to the final round, even if the hold continuous effect is executed at the timing after the executable period of the selection effect ends. Good.

Further, regarding the jackpot state as an advantageous state, a normal jackpot as a first advantageous state and a probabilistic jackpot as a second advantageous state which is more advantageous than the first advantageous state may be provided. Then, a probabilistic promotion effect that promotes to a probabilistic jackpot during a normal jackpot may be executed. For example, it is assumed that the probabilistic promotion effect can be executed at any of a plurality of timings in the round. Then, as one of the plurality of timings, the probabilistic promotion effect may be executed at the timing when any one of the plurality of items at the start of the round is selected. In this way, the player can be surprised at the selection effect of selecting the music at the start of the big hit, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the case of the probabilistic promotion effect, the execution timing may be determined at the start of the big hit. Then, as the execution timing of the probabilistic promotion effect, there may be a plurality of timings at the time of selecting a song, at the result of the fixed probabilistic promotion effect of 11R to 13R, and at the ending (after the end of 16R). Good. When the timing at the time of selecting a song is determined by a predetermined random number lottery from these three patterns, the probabilistic promotion effect may be executed in the selection effect of selecting the song at the start of the big hit.

Further, a plurality of jackpots having different rounds may be provided, and the present invention may be applied to a round promotion effect in which a jackpot with a small number of rounds is promoted to a jackpot with a large number of rounds.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a music selection process at the time of a big hit. The jackpot music selection process is executed in the effect control process process executed by the effect control microcomputer 90100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 90201). In the big hit music selection process, when it is a big hit, the process for the effect shown in FIG. 47 is executed. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given based on the flowchart.

In the jackpot music selection process, first, the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not the current round is in the period of 1R to 2R (S90601). When the effect control CPU 90201 determines that the current round is in the period of 1R to 2R (Y in S90601), the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not the initial music determination flag is set (S90602). When the initial music determination flag is set (Y in S90602), the effect control CPU 90201 stores various data in the storage area (S90609) and ends the process.

In S90602, when the initial music determination flag is not set (N in S90602), the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not it is the music change period (S90603), and determines that it is the music change period. In the case (Y in S90603), it is determined whether or not there is a selection operation (S90604). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the music change period (N in S90603), the effect control CPU 90201 stores various data in the storage area (S90609) and ends the process.

In S90604, when it is determined that there is a selection operation (Y in S90604), the effect control CPU 90201 reproduces the video and the music corresponding to the music from the chorus according to the music selection (S90605). On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no selection operation (N in S90604), the effect control CPU 90201 stores various data in the storage area (S90609) and ends the process.

In S90606 after S90605, the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not there is a determination operation (S90606). When it is determined that there is a determination operation (Y in S90606), the effect control CPU 90201 reproduces the video and the music corresponding to the determined music from the beginning (S90607). Next, the initial music determination flag is set (S90608), various data are stored in the storage area (S90609), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no determination operation (N in S90606), the effect control CPU 90201 stores various data in the storage area (S90609) and ends the process.

In S90601, when it is determined that the current round is not the period of 1R to 2R, the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not the final music determination flag is set (S90610). When the final music determination flag is set (Y in S90610), the effect control CPU 90201 stores various data in the storage area (S90609) and ends the process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the final music determination flag is not set (N in S90610), the effect control CPU 90201 displays the music change screen (S90611). Next, it is determined whether or not the screen change flag is set (S90612).

In S90612, when it is determined that the screen change flag is not set (N in S90612), the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not there is a change operation (S90613). When the effect control CPU 90201 determines that there is no change operation (N in S90613), the video and music corresponding to the initial music are played as they are (S90616), and various data are stored in the storage area (S90609). End the process. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 90201 determines that there is a change operation (Y in S90613), the screen flag is set (S90614), and the music selection screen in which the initial music is "returned" is displayed (S90615). , S90617. In S90612, when it is determined that the screen change flag is set (Y in S90612), the effect control CPU 90201 shifts to S90617 without performing the processing of S90613 to S90615.

In S90617, the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not it is the music change period. When the effect control CPU 90201 determines that it is the music change period (Y in S90617), it determines whether or not there is a selection operation (S90618). In S90617, when it is determined that it is not the music change period (N in S90617), the effect control CPU 90201 stores various data in the storage area (S90609) and ends the process. When it is determined that there is a selection operation (Y in S90618), the effect control CPU 90201 reproduces the video corresponding to the selected music from the chorus and plays the initial music as it is (S90619). Then, it shifts to S90620. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no selection operation (N in S90618), the effect control CPU 90201 stores various data in the storage area (S90609) and ends the process.

In S90620, the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not there is a determination operation. When it is determined that there is a determination operation (Y in S90620), the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not the initial music has been determined (S90621). In S90620, when it is determined that there is no determination operation (N in S90620), the effect control CPU 90201 stores various data in the storage area (S90609) and ends the process. In S90621, when the initial music is determined (Y in S90621), the video corresponding to the initial music is played continuously and the initial music is played as it is (S90622). Next, the final music determination flag is set (S90624), various data are stored in the storage area (S90609), and the process ends. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 90201 is not determined as the initial music (N in S90621), the effect control CPU 90201 reproduces the video corresponding to the changed music from the beginning and reproduces the changed music from the beginning (S90623). Next, the final music determination flag is set (S90624), various data are stored in the storage area (S90609), and the process ends.

[Modified example of music selection control]
Next, in the pachinko gaming machine 901, a modified example of the selection control of the music to be played during the game such as the jackpot music will be described. In this modification, a music selection control process that enables selection of a music to be played during a game according to a player's operation (operation) when a predetermined menu screen is displayed will be described. The music selection control process is executed by the effect control CPU 90201.

[Menu screen configuration]
The menu screen has various settings that can be selected by the player on the effect display device 909 at specific timings such as when the customer waiting demo display (abbreviation of the customer waiting demonstration display) and when the big game state starts. This is a display screen that presents items in a choice format (menu format) image. The customer waiting demo display means that in a state where the game is not executed for a predetermined period (customer waiting state), the effect display device 909 displays a predetermined image as a demonstration display other than the image displayed during the game. The menu screen includes a main menu screen and a submenu screen. The main menu screen is a screen that displays an upper menu image that can display main setting items in a list format. The submenu screen is a screen for displaying the detailed items of the setting items selected and determined in response to the selection and determination of any of the setting items displayed on the main menu screen.

On the main menu screen of the menu screen, icon images (hereinafter referred to as icons) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of setting items are displayed side by side in the vertical direction. The plurality of types of setting items include music selection settings for setting the music to be played during the game. On the main menu screen, as the icon image corresponding to the music selection setting, a music image which is an icon image capable of specifying information about the music is displayed.

On the main menu screen, a selectable display is displayed in which an icon corresponding to one selectable setting item among a plurality of types of setting items is highlighted (high brightness display). When the stick controller that can be operated in the front-back direction and the left-right direction is tilted forward, the icon that is displayed as selectable is switched upward, and the stick controller is tilted backward. Correspondingly, the icon that is displayed as selectable is switched downward. When the push button is operated, the display screen is switched from the main menu screen to the submenu screen corresponding to the setting item corresponding to the selectable icon.

[Composition of music selection screen]
FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a control example of music selection control executed when a music is selected and determined using a music selection screen displayed as a submenu screen.

FIG. 49A shows an example of displaying a music selection screen that can be displayed on the effect display device 909. FIG. 49B shows a patrol image of the music image on the music selection screen. FIG. 49C shows the scroll speed setting data of the music image. FIG. 49 (D) shows the scroll mode setting data of the music image. FIG. 49 (E) shows the scroll mode effect pattern data of the music image.

When the music selection setting is selected and determined according to the operation of the player on the main menu screen, the music selection screen as shown in FIG. 49A is displayed as the submenu screen on the effect display device 909. On the music selection screen, music images corresponding to a plurality of types (for example, 6 types) of music as shown in FIG. 49B can be displayed by the selectable music image 9096 or the non-selectable music image 9097. Music images corresponding to a plurality of types of music can be scrolled to the left or right according to the patrol order indicated by the arrows in the figure. The music image is an icon-shaped image showing information about the music such as the music name (hereinafter referred to as music information). The scroll display of the music image is an embodiment in which the music image moves to the left or right as shown by an arrow in FIG. 49 (A) in response to the stick controller 9031A being operated to the left or right. Is executed by.

As shown in FIG. 49 (B), the music images displayed on the music selection screen include a selectable music image 9096 corresponding to the selectable music that can be selected for playback, and a music image 9096 for playback. A non-selectable music image 9097 corresponding to a non-selectable music that cannot be selected yet is included. The selectable music image 9096 and the non-selectable music image 9097 are displayed separately based on the following conditions. For example, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is turned on, a predetermined music (for example, the first music and the second music) is initially set as a selectable music, and other music (for example, the third music to the sixth music) is selected. Initially set as an impossible song. Then, every time a specific music addition condition is satisfied, control for adding and increasing selectable music is executed by the effect control CPU 90201. As a result, the non-selectable music image 9097 can be changed to the selectable music image 9096 every time the music addition condition is satisfied.

The specific music addition condition is, for example, a predetermined number of times (for example, the effect control CPU 90201 counts the fluctuation display number) of the integrated value of the fluctuation display number of the special symbol executed from the time when the power is turned on in one day (for example). For example, it is established every time it reaches 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 49A, the selectable music image 9096 and the non-selectable music image 9097 can be displayed together on the music selection screen. As a result, it is possible to raise the interest of the player regarding the production of playing the music and improve the interest of the game.

The selectable music image 9096 is displayed as an icon image in a display mode in which an image such as music information is shown as a color image. On the other hand, the non-selectable music image 9097 is displayed as an icon image in a display mode in which an image such as music information is shown as a gray image (monochrome image using gray or the like). In FIG. 49 (A), the non-selectable music image 9097 is shaded in order to distinguish between the color image selectable music image 9096 and the gray image non-selectable music image 9097. By displaying the selectable music image 9096 and the non-selectable music image 9097 in different display modes in this way, it is possible to visually determine which of the plurality of types of music can be selected (playable). It is easily distinguishable.

As shown in FIG. 49 (A), in the central portion of the music selection screen, a selection area 9098 is provided as an area in which the music image to be selected can be retained and displayed (stopped display). On the music selection screen, in the selection area 9098, any selectable music image 9096 is displayed as a stay (stop display) in a display mode in which the entire image is displayed. On the music selection screen, the non-selectable music image 9097 is not displayed (stopped) in the selection area 9098.

[Scroll display mode on the music selection screen]
When the stick controller is tilted once to the left, the music image is scrolled to the left in response to the operation. On the other hand, when the stick controller is tilted once to the right, the music image is scrolled to the right in response to the operation. In the scroll display in either the left direction or the right direction, the selectable music image 9096 displayed before the scroll display in the selection area 9098 is changed according to the circulation order of the music images in response to one operation. , The scroll display is changed to a new selectable music image 9096. When such a scroll display is performed, the non-selectable music image 9097 is scroll-displayed according to the circulation order of the music images, but after being temporarily displayed (displayed so as to temporarily stay) on the selection area 9098. , Is displayed to move.

The scroll display according to the operation of the stick controller is as described below when the music image of the next patrol order in the scroll order in the scroll direction is the selectable music image 9096 and the non-selectable music image 9097. It is executed in a scroll display mode different from that at a certain time.

In the scroll display of the music image, the music image in the next patrol order in the scroll display direction of the selectable music image 9096 that was retained and displayed in the selection area 9098 before the operation can be selected in the music image 9096. When there is, the selectable music image 9096 of the next next patrol order is newly retained and displayed in the selection area 9098 after the scroll display, so that the selectable music image 9096 staying and displayed in the selection area 9098 is changed. Will be done.

That is, when the music image in the next cyclic order is the selectable music image 9096, the selectable music image 9096 is newly retained and displayed in the selection area 9098 after the scroll display. As a specific example, in the case of scrolling to the left, the music image corresponding to the first music that was retained and displayed in the selection area 9098 before the scroll display is the selectable music image 9096, which is shown in FIG. 49 (B). As described above, when the music image corresponding to the second music in the next patrol order of the first music is the selectable music image 9096, the selectable music image 9096 corresponding to the second music is newly selected as the selection area after the scroll display. It is displayed as staying at 9098.

On the other hand, in the scroll display, the music image of the selectable music image 9096 staying and displayed in the selection area 9098 before the operation in the scrolling order in the scrolling direction is the non-selectable music image 9097. When, after the non-selectable music image 9097 of the next next patrol order is once displayed in the selection area 9098 (display that temporarily stays), the next is displayed by scrolling regardless of the player's action. The selectable music image 9096 corresponding to the next or subsequent order of the circulation order of the non-selectable music image 9097 is newly retained and displayed in the selection area 9098, so that the selectable music image 9098 is retained and displayed in the selection area 9098. 9096 is changed.

That is, when the music image of the next patrol order is the non-selectable music image 9097, after the scroll display, the non-selectable music image 9097 including the non-selectable music image 9097 is displayed. It is displayed that the music image 9096 passes over the selected area 9098 while being temporarily displayed on the selected area 9098, and the selectable music image 9096 in the subsequent patrol order is newly displayed in the selected area 9098, so that the selected area 9098 is displayed. The selectable music image 9096 that is retained and displayed in is changed. As a specific example, in the case of scrolling to the right, the music image corresponding to the first music that is retained and displayed in the selection area 9098 before the scroll display is the selectable music image 9096, which is shown in FIG. 49 (B). As described above, the music image corresponding to each of the sixth music, the fifth music, and the fourth music in the next patrol order of the first music is the unselectable music image 9097, and the third music image in the next patrol order. When the music image corresponding to the music is the selectable music image 9096, the non-selectable music image 9097 corresponding to each of the sixth music, the fifth music, and the fourth music is displayed on the selection area 9098 in the scroll display. The display passes over the selected area 9098 while being displayed once (displayed to temporarily stay), and after the scroll display, the selectable music image 9096 corresponding to the third music is newly retained and displayed in the selected area 9098. ..

As described above, on the music selection screen, the selectable music image 9096 which is retained and displayed in the selection area 9098 by the scroll display according to one operation by the player is changed to the selectable image corresponding to the next order. It can be changed.

As shown in FIG. 49 (A), in the areas on the left and right sides of the selection area 9098 on the music selection screen, the music image in the patrol order immediately before the selectable music image 9096 stopped and displayed in the selection area 9098, Each of the music images in the subsequent patrol order is stopped and displayed in a display mode in which a part of the image is displayed. As a result, the selectable music image 9096 may stop and display the entire image or a part of the image. On the other hand, in the non-selectable music image 9097, the entire image may not be stopped and displayed, and a part of the image may be stopped and displayed. As for the non-selectable music image 9097, since a part of the image is stopped and displayed, it becomes possible to recognize that there is a non-selectable image, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Scroll display setting on the music selection screen]
The scroll display on the music selection screen is based on the scroll speed setting data of FIG. 49 (C), the scroll mode setting data of FIG. 49 (D), and the scroll mode effect pattern data of FIG. 49 (E). (Effect pattern) is set and executed.

FIG. 49C shows scroll speed setting data used when setting the scroll speed when executing the scroll display on the music selection screen. As shown in FIG. 49 (C), the scroll speed is set as follows when the scroll display is executed on the music selection screen.

The selectable music image 9096 and the selectable music image 9096, such as between the first music image and the second music image in FIG. 49 (B) and between the second music image and the third music image. In the scroll display between each other, the first speed V1 is set as the scroll speed. Non-selectable music image 9097 and non-selectable music image 9097, such as between the fourth music image and the fifth music image in FIG. 49 (B) and between the fifth music image and the sixth music image. The second speed V2 is set as the scroll speed for the scroll display between the two. In the scroll display between the selectable music image 9096 and the non-selectable music image 9097, such as between the first music image and the sixth music image in FIG. 49 (B), the second speed V2 is the scroll speed. Is set as. As shown in FIG. 49 (C), the second speed V2 is higher than the first speed V1.

As described above, regarding the scroll display on the music selection screen, the scroll speed differs between the selectable music images and the non-selectable music images. As a result, the effect pattern of the effect using the scroll display becomes rich in variety, and the interest of the game can be improved. Regarding the scroll display speed, the second speed V2 between the non-selectable music images is higher than the first speed V1 between the selectable music images. As a result, it is possible to reduce the period during which the non-selectable music image 9097 is displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 49 (D) shows scroll mode setting data used when setting the scroll mode when executing the scroll display on the music selection screen. The scroll mode is a mode of an effect pattern when scrolling is displayed. The scroll mode includes a low-speed scroll mode and a high-speed scroll mode.

As shown in FIG. 49 (D), when the next scrolling order of scrolling is selectable music image 9096 with the selection area 9098 as a reference position, the low-speed scroll mode is selected. For example, when the first music image which is the selectable music image 9096 is scrolled to the left from the state where the first music image which is the selectable music image 9096 is displayed in the selection area 9098, the next patrol order is the selectable music image 9096 in the second music image. In some cases, the slow scroll mode is selected. On the other hand, when the next scrolling order of scrolling is the non-selectable music image 9097 with the selection area 9098 as the reference position, the high-speed scroll mode is selected. For example, when the first music image which is the selectable music image 9096 is scrolled to the right from the state where the first music image which is the selectable music image 9096 is displayed in the selection area 9098, the sixth music image which is the music image 9097 whose next patrol order cannot be selected. When is, the fast scroll mode is selected.

FIG. 49 (E) shows the effect pattern data of the scroll display for each scroll mode. In the low-speed scroll mode, the scroll display is executed with an effect pattern in which the music image is moved at the first speed V1 and the selectable music image 9096 in the next patrol order is retained and displayed in the selection area 9098. For example, when the first music image, which is the selectable music image 9096, is scrolled to the left from the state where the music image 9096 can be selected in the selection area 9098, the music image is moved at the first speed V1 by the low-speed scroll mode. The scroll display is performed with an effect pattern in which the second music image, which is the selectable music image 9096 in the next patrol order, is retained and displayed in the selection area 9098.

In the high-speed scroll mode, the music image is moved at the second speed V2, and the music image 9097 whose next patrol order cannot be selected is temporarily displayed in the selection area 9098 (display that temporarily stays) while being passed through. Finally, the scroll display is executed with an effect pattern in which the selectable music images of the next order after the non-selectable image of the next patrol order are retained and displayed in the selection area. For example, when the first music image, which is the selectable music image 9096, is scrolled to the right from the state in which the selectable music image 9096 is retained and displayed, the music image is moved at the second speed V2 by the high-speed scroll mode. The sixth music image, the fifth music image, and the fourth music image, which are the music images 9097 that cannot be selected in the next patrol order, are displayed in the selection area while being temporarily displayed in the 9098, and the skipped display is displayed. The scroll display is executed with an effect pattern in which the third music image, which is the possible music image 9096, is retained and displayed in the selected area. The non-selectable music image 9097 can be displayed once in the selection area 9098 so that the player's interest in the production can be increased. Further, since the music corresponding to the non-selectable music image 9097 cannot be selected but is not left displayed, the player can misunderstand that the music can be selected.

Data for displaying the music image shown in FIG. 49 (A), data relating to the circulation order of the music images shown in FIG. 49 (B), scroll speed setting data shown in FIG. 49 (C), and FIG. 49 (D). Each of the scroll mode setting data and the scroll mode effect pattern data shown in FIG. 49 (E) is stored in the effect control ROM, and when the scroll display is executed on the music selection screen, the scroll display is displayed. Used for various settings, etc.

[Music selection process]
FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of a music selection process executed by the effect control CPU 90201. By executing the music selection process described below, the music to be played by the player's operation can be played at a specific timing such as when the customer waiting demo display (abbreviation of the demonstration display) and when the jackpot game state starts. It is selectable. As a result, the music to be played during the game can be selected and determined according to the player's intention (preference).

When the music selection process is executed when the customer waiting demo is displayed, the selected music is played during the variable display of the effect symbol. When the music selection process is executed at the start of the jackpot game state, the selected music is played, for example, during the jackpot game state. In the following, an example of executing the music selection process at the start of the jackpot game state will be described.

As described above, on the main menu screen, the music selection setting items (not shown) are selected and determined, and the music selection screen shown in FIG. 49 (A) is displayed as the submenu screen by the player. It is possible to select and determine the music to be played during the game according to the operation of the stick controller and the operation of the push button.

Specifically, in the state where the music selection screen is displayed, the displayed music image is scrolled to the left or right based on the player tilting the stick controller to the left or right. As a result, it is possible to perform a selection switching operation for switching the music image staying and displayed in the selection area 9098. Further, by pressing the push button, it is possible to perform a determination operation of determining the music to be played during the game as the music corresponding to the music image retained and displayed in the selection area 9098.

When the music selection process is executed at the time of displaying the customer waiting demo, it is executed for a predetermined period during the execution of the customer waiting demo display in the effect control process process. Further, when the music selection process is executed at the start of the jackpot game state, the music selection process is executed for a predetermined period during the execution of the customer waiting demo display in the effect control process process. The music selection process is not limited to when the customer waiting demo is displayed and when the jackpot game state starts, but may be executed at other timings such as when the probability change state starts or when the time saving state starts.

In the following, an example of executing the music selection process at the start of the jackpot game state will be described.
In the music selection process, the effect control CPU 90201 first determines whether or not the music selection flag is set in order to confirm whether or not the music selection screen is displayed (S90720). .. The song selection flag is a flag for determining whether or not the song selection screen (FIG. 49 (A)) is displayed, and when a song selection setting item is selected and determined on the main menu screen. , It is set in the main menu display process executed separately from the music selection process, and is reset in S90730 described later. For example, the effect control CPU 90201 determines that the music selection screen is displayed if the music selection flag is set, and determines that the music selection screen is not displayed if it is not set.

If the music selection flag is not set (S90720; No), the effect control CPU 90201 ends the music selection process. On the other hand, when the music selection flag is set (S90720; Yes), the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not the selection switching operation by the stick controller has been performed (S90721). Specifically, in S90721, the presence or absence of the selection switching operation is determined based on the detection signal from the sensor.

When there is no selection switching operation (S90721; No), the effect control CPU 90201 executes the process of S90727 described later. On the other hand, when there is a selection switching operation (S90721; Yes), the effect control CPU 90201 has the next order of the circulation order of the music images in the scroll display (leftward scrolling display or rightward scrolling display) according to the selection switching operation. It is determined whether or not the selectable music image 9096 is used (S90722).

For example, as shown in FIG. 49 (A), when the music image retained and displayed in the selection area 9098 is the first music image and the stick controller is tilted once to the right, the music image is scrolled to the left. It is determined whether or not the second music image in the next patrol order after the first music image is the selectable music image 9096 in the patrol order of. As shown in FIG. 49 (B), when the second music image is the selectable music image 9096 (S90722; Yes), the process of S90725 described later is executed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 49 (A), when the music image retained and displayed in the selection area 9098 is the first music image and the stick controller is tilted once to the right, the music image is scrolled to the right. It is determined whether or not the sixth music image in the next circulation order after the first music image is the selectable music image 9096 in the circulation order of. As shown in FIG. 49 (B), when the sixth music image is the non-selectable music image 9097 (S90722; No), the process of S90723 described later is executed.

If it is determined in S90722 that the next order is not the selectable music image 9096, the first selectable music image 9096 after the next order of the circulation order of the music images in the scroll display (left scroll display or right scroll display). Is determined as the next retention display image (S90723). Then, the scroll display for moving the next stay display image determined in S90723 up to the selection area 9098 in the direction in which the selection switching operation is performed is executed in the high-speed mode (S90724).

For example, as shown in FIG. 49 (A), when the music image retained and displayed in the selection area 9098 is the first music image and the stick controller is tilted once to the right, the music image is scrolled to the left. As shown in FIG. 49 (B) in the patrol order, the music image in the patrol order next to the first music image is the sixth music image as the non-selectable music image 9097. In that case, since the first selectable music image 9096 after the next order of the sixth music image is the third music image, the third music image is determined as the next stay display image (S90723). Then, the scroll display for moving the third music image to the right to the selection area 9098 is executed in the high-speed mode (S90724). As a result, the rightward scroll display in the high-speed mode is executed, and in the selection area 9098, the sixth music image, the fifth music image, and the fourth music image are displayed in this order, and the music images are skipped and moved. After that, the third music image is finally displayed as a retention.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S90722 that the next order is the selectable music image 9096, the music image in the next order of the circulation order of the music images in the scroll display (left scroll display or right scroll display) is displayed next time. Determined to be an image (S90725). Then, the scroll display for moving the next stay display image determined in S90725 up to the selection area 9098 in the direction in which the selection switching operation is performed is executed in the low speed mode (S90726).

For example, as shown in FIG. 49 (A), when the music image retained and displayed in the selection area 9098 is the first music image and the stick controller is tilted once to the left, the music image is scrolled to the left. As shown in FIG. 49 (B) in the patrol order, the music image in the patrol order next to the first music image is the second music image as the selectable music image 9096. In that case, the second music image, which is the selectable music image 9096 in the order next to the first music image, is determined as the next stay display image (S90725). Then, the scroll display for moving the next stay display image determined in S90725 to the left to the selection area 9098 is executed in the low speed mode (S90726). As a result, the scroll display in the right direction in the low speed mode is executed, and the second music image is retained and displayed in the selection area 9098.

When it is determined that there is no selection switching operation after the execution of S90724, after the execution of S90726, or in S90721, the effect control CPU 90201 determines whether or not there is a determination operation for determining the selected music (S90727). Specifically, in S90727, the presence or absence of the determination operation by the push button is determined based on the detection signal from the sensor.

If there is no determination operation (S90727; No), the effect control CPU 90201 ends the music selection process. On the other hand, when there is a determination operation (S90727; Yes), the effect control CPU 90201 determines the music that is retained and displayed in the selection area 9098 to be played during the game (the music that is played during the jackpot game state). (S90728). For example, when the determination operation is performed while the first music image is retained and displayed in the selection area 9098, the music to be played during the game is determined to be the first music corresponding to the first music image.

The effect control CPU 90201 determines (S90728) that the music staying and displayed in the selection area 9098 is to be played during the game (song to be played during the big hit game state), and then returns to the main menu screen from the music selection screen. It is displayed (S90729). Then, the music selection flag is reset (S90730), and the music selection process ends. In this way, when the music to be played during the game is determined on the music selection screen, the display of the music selection screen ends and the main menu screen is displayed.

In this embodiment, the music selection flag is not reset until the determination operation is performed, but a predetermined period after the music selection flag is set or after the selection operation is last performed. When the lapse of time has elapsed, the music corresponding to the music image retained and displayed in the selection area 9098 may be determined, the music selection screen may be switched to the menu screen, and the music selection flag may be reset. In addition, it was decided to return to the menu screen from the music selection screen by performing the decision operation, but by providing a "back" button on the music selection screen, selecting the "back" button, and pressing the push button 9031B. , You may reset the music selection flag and return to the menu screen.

(1) The gaming machine of the above modified example is
It is a gaming machine that plays games (such as pachinko gaming machine 901).
Music playback means (such as CPU 90201 for production control) that can play music during a specific period (such as a period in a jackpot game state),
A music selection screen display means capable of displaying a music selection screen (music selection screen, etc. in FIG. 49) in which a music to be played can be selected from a plurality of types of music (playback effect of the plurality of types of music in FIG. 49, etc.). Prepare,
The music to be played in the specific period can be selected from a plurality of types of music (musics A to F, etc.).
The music playing means reproduces a specific part of the selected music at the time of music selection and is different from the beginning of the music (such as the production control CPU 90201 playing the chorus part).
On the music selection screen, a selectable image (selectable music image 9096, etc. in FIG. 49) capable of identifying selectable music (first music to third music, etc. in FIG. 49) and a music (still unselectable music, etc.) It is possible to display a non-selectable image (non-selectable music image 9097, etc. in FIG. 49) that can identify the fourth to sixth music, etc. in FIG. 49 together (FIG. 49 (A), etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effect of producing the music when the music is selected.
(2) In the game machine of (1) above
The effect selection screen displays a part of the non-selectable image as the non-selectable image (a part of the non-selectable music image 9097 shown by diagonal lines in FIG. 49 (A) is displayed as a gray image, etc. ), You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by making it possible to recognize that there is a non-selectable image.

(3) In the game machine of the above (1) or the above (2)
The effect selection screen is
A plurality of the selectable images and the non-selectable images in a predetermined order (such as the scrolling order of the music images shown in FIG. 49B) according to the player's operation (selection switching operation by left / right operation of the stick controller, etc.). Images (musical music images, etc. shown in FIG. 49 (B)) can be scroll-displayed (scroll-display, etc. shown in the direction of the arrows in FIG.
By displaying the selectable image in a predetermined display area (selection area 9098 in FIG. 49) (displaying in the selection area 9098 in FIG. 49), the effect to be executed is specified (corresponding to the music to be played). Identify the music image in the center of the screen, etc.),
The effect selection screen display means
The image corresponding to the next order (normal order) of the selectable images staying and displayed in the predetermined display area is next to the first music which is the selectable music image 9096 in FIG. 49 (A). When the second music image corresponding to the second music in the patrol order is selectable music image 9096, etc.), the selection corresponding to the next order is performed by scrolling display according to one operation by the player. It is possible to change to a possible image (in the low-speed scroll mode (FIG. 49 (E)) in which scroll display is executed and the selectable music image 9096 in the next order is retained and displayed in the selection area 9098 according to S90725 and S90726 in FIG. Scroll display, etc.),
The image corresponding to the next order (reverse order) of the selectable images staying and displayed in the predetermined display area is the unselectable image (FIG. 49 (A), the sixth of the next patrol order of the first music. When the sixth music image corresponding to the music is a non-selectable music image 9097, etc.), the selection in the next order in the predetermined display area by the scroll display according to one operation by the player. After displaying the impossible image once, the selectable image corresponding to the next order or later of the non-selectable image in the next order is displayed in the predetermined display area by scroll display regardless of the operation of the player. Retention display (according to S9072 and S90724 in FIG. 50, scroll display is executed to skip and display the non-selectable music image 9097 while displaying it once, and finally the selectable music image 9096 after the next patrol order is retained. A high-speed scroll mode for displaying (such as scrolling in the display mode (FIG. 49 (E))) may be used.

According to such a configuration, once the non-selectable image is displayed in a predetermined display area, the player's interest in the effect can be increased.

(4) In the game machine of (3) above
In the effect selection screen, the scroll speed in the scroll display is between the selectable images (first speed V1 or the like in FIG. 49 (B)) and between the non-selectable images (the first in FIG. 49 (B)). (2 speed V2, etc.) may be different (scroll speed ratio “V1 <V2”, etc. in FIG. 49 (C)).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by having different scroll speeds.

(5) In the game machine of (4) above
In the effect selection screen, the scroll speed in the scroll display is higher than that between the selectable images (speed V1 in FIG. 49 (B), etc.) and between the non-selectable images (speed V2 in FIG. 49 (B)). Etc.) may be higher (such as the scroll speed ratio “V1 <V2” in FIG. 49 (C)).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the period during which the non-selectable image is displayed, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

(6) In any of the game machines (3) to (5) above,
In the effect selection screen, the scroll speed in the scroll display differs depending on the operation period of the player ([Example in which the scroll speed differs depending on the operation period of the player]).

According to such a configuration, the scroll speed differs depending on the operating period of the player, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, modified examples, feature points, and the like of the embodiments described above are listed below.
(1) In the above-described embodiment, a plurality of types of opening patterns of the special variable winning ball device 22 by a small hit of the second special symbol may be provided. For example, a pattern having a large number of short openings and a pattern having a small number of short openings may be provided. Further, the type of the symbol displayed as the effect symbol may be different depending on the type of the open pattern. Specifically, if it is an opening pattern that is advantageous to the player (such as a large number of openings), it is stopped with a red symbol combination, and if it is an opening pattern that is disadvantageous to the player (such as a small number of openings), it is blue. It may be stopped by a symbol combination. Further, if it is an advantageous opening pattern, a small hit may be won with the "4" symbol, and if it is an unfavorable opening pattern, a small hit may be won with the "2" symbol. The opening time may be different instead of the number of opening times.

(2) In the above-described embodiment, an example of playing a series of premium images even when there is a hold memory of a small hit between big hits has been described. However, the video to be played may be different depending on whether there is a small hit hold memory between the big hits and a small hit hold memory between the big hits. Further, the type of premium video may be different depending on the number of small hits between big hits (depending on one or two small hits).

(3) In the above-described embodiment, the first acquired image 90196 when the small hit state is controlled during the period from the big hit state to the next big hit state, and the second acquired image 90197 and the second acquired image 90197 in other periods. 3 The acquired image 90198 may have the same display mode. Further, the first acquired image 90196 and the third acquired image 90198 in which there is a small hit in the hold may be the same. In addition, the numerical value of the acquired image may display the total number of each winning in a single opening, instead of giving the total number of acquisitions in a small hit, and may be obtained for each winning of one ball. The number may be displayed continuously.

(4) In the above-described embodiment, the music change is described as a selection effect that can be selected and operated by the player. However, the effect changed by the selected effect may be something other than a musical piece. For example, the effect changed by the selection effect may be a background change effect, a video change effect, a character change effect, or the like. In such a case, if what was once selected is selected again, the effect may be taken over. Specifically, in a game machine that can reserve to change the background by operating a push button, I tried to change the background, but when I wanted to keep the current background, the production with the current background is It may be continued (for example, music in the current background is continuously played).

(5) In the above-described embodiment, the case where the music selection effect can be executed during the big hit has been described. However, the music selection effect may be executed during the rush hour, or may be executed in the non-KT state. In such a case, a plurality of periods during which the selection effect can be executed are provided, and the music is divided into a period when the number of fluctuations is small (1 to 10 times) and a period when the number of fluctuations is large (70 to 100 times). The selection effect of may be executed. In addition, the selection effect may be executed during the customer waiting demonstration. For example, the menu screen can be opened by operating the push button during the customer waiting demonstration, and the volume and light intensity of the pachinko gaming machine can be adjusted in the menu screen, and the execution frequency of the production can be changed. Good.

(6) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 47 (e), the case where the currently executed item is changed to the character “return” has been described. However, the color and shape of the currently executed item may be different instead of changing to characters.

(7) In the above-described embodiment, the case where the music is reproduced from the chorus portion of the music has been described. Depending on the music, it may be reproduced from a part other than "rust" (such as a verse), or the part reproduced by the music may be different.

(8) In the above-described embodiment, the jackpot period in the jackpot gaming state is a period in which the attacker opening is repeated, that is, a round gaming period, but the jackpot period is not limited to this. For example, the jackpot period includes the period of the fanfare effect executed at the start of the jackpot game state, the period of repeating the attacker opening (round game period), and the period of the ending effect executed at the end of the jackpot game state. It may be a period. The fanfare effect is an effect that is executed at the start of the jackpot game state and notifies that the jackpot game state has been reached. The ending effect is an effect that is executed at the end of the jackpot game state to notify the end of the jackpot game state.

(9) In the various controls for selecting music described above, medals are inserted, a predetermined number of bets are set, a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the stop button is operated by the player. If the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols in the display means are stopped according to the above, it is also possible to apply to a slot machine (slot machine) in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player. is there. In the slot machine, a music selection or determination operation may be executed by a push button or a cross key provided on the housing.

(10) In the above-described embodiment, the jackpot gaming state has been described as a representative example as an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. However, not limited to this, the advantageous states that are advantageous to the player may include other advantageous states such as a high probability state (probability variation state), a time saving state, and a high base state.

(11) As an embodiment of this embodiment, a game machine in which a game medium is paid out to a player's hand when a prize is generated has been described. However, the game medium is enclosed and the game medium is delivered to the player when a prize is generated. An enclosed game machine that adds game points (scores) without paying out at hand may be adopted. The enclosed game machine has a circulation path for circulating a plurality of balls, which is an example of a game medium, in the game machine, and is provided with a storage unit for storing game points, depending on the ball lending operation. The game points are added to the storage unit, the game points are subtracted from the storage unit according to the ball firing operation, and the game points are added to the storage unit according to the occurrence of a prize.

(12) In the above-described embodiment, for example, a case where a plurality of types of special symbols and effect symbols of "1" to "9" are variablely displayed and the display result is derived and displayed is shown, but the variable display is such a case. It is not limited to the aspect. For example, the symbol to be variablely displayed and the symbol to be derived and displayed do not necessarily have to be the same, and a symbol different from the variablely displayed symbol may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to display a plurality of types of symbols in a variable manner, and the variable display may be executed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be executed by alternately turning on and blinking the one type of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed at the end, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed at the end. It may be a thing.

(13) In the above-described embodiment, a predetermined value exceeding 0% as the “ratio (ratio, probability)” has been described as a specific example. However, the "ratio (ratio, probability)" may be 0%. For example, when the occurrence rate of the predetermined game state 1 and the occurrence rate of the other game state 2 in the predetermined game period are compared and it is determined that "one occurrence rate is higher than the other occurrence rate". , The case where the occurrence rate of one of the gaming states is 0% is also included.

(14) In the above-described embodiment, after the variation display result when it is determined that the display result of the variation display is the probability variation jackpot is derived and displayed, the probability variation state is unconditionally changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. An example of controlled probability change state control is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the detection means detects that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided in the large winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 9020, the probability variation determining device is controlled to the probability variation state. Type probabilistic state control may be performed.

(15) It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are examples in all respects and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

1 Pachinko game machine 5 Production display device 31B Push button 120 CPU for production control
400 Movable accessory 401 1st movable part 402 2nd movable part 901 Pachinko game machine 909 Production display device 9015 Variable winning ball device 9022 Special variable winning ball device 90200 Microcomputer for production control 90560 Microcomputer for game control

Claims (3)

It is a game machine that can play games
An operating body that can be operated by the player,
Movable movable body and
An operation effect executing means capable of executing an operation effect for operating the movable body based on the operation of the operation body, and an operation effect executing means.
A display means capable of displaying an image corresponding to the operating body corresponding to the operating body as an image for encouraging the operation of the operating body when executing the operation effect.
With
The display mode of the image corresponding to the operating body can be changed according to the movement of the movable body.
further,
Item display means for displaying multiple items corresponding to multiple types of effects that can be selected by the player,
A selection effect means capable of executing a selection effect for selecting any of the plurality of items,
And a corresponding demonstration execution unit capable of executing an effect corresponding to the selected item in the selected representation section from among the plurality of types of effect,
The item display means can display items corresponding to the first effect even when the first effect of the plurality of types of effects is being executed in the selected effect.
The selection effect includes a first selection effect executed regardless of the movement of the player and a second selection effect executed based on the movement of the player.
The corresponding effect execution means
When the item corresponding to the second effect different from the first effect is selected in the state where the first effect is executed , the second effect is executed.
In a state where the first effect is running, it performs the if the item corresponding is selected again the first effect, takes over the state of the first effect being executed,
Music can be played as the plurality of types of effects,
When the item selected in the first selection effect is changed, the music to be played is changed according to the change of the selected item.
Even if the item selected in the second selection effect is changed, the music to be played is not changed.
A game machine characterized by that. It is a game machine that can play games
An operating body that can be operated by the player,
A predetermined effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect by a predetermined image based on the operation of the operating body, and
A display means capable of displaying an image corresponding to the operating body corresponding to the operating body as an image for prompting the operation of the operating body when executing the predetermined effect.
With
The display mode of the image corresponding to the operating body can be changed according to the predetermined effect.
further,
Item display means for displaying multiple items corresponding to multiple types of effects that can be selected by the player,
A selection effect means capable of executing a selection effect for selecting any of the plurality of items,
And a corresponding demonstration execution unit capable of executing an effect corresponding to the selected item in the selected representation section from among the plurality of types of effect,
The item display means can display items corresponding to the first effect even when the first effect of the plurality of types of effects is being executed in the selected effect.
The selection effect includes a first selection effect executed regardless of the movement of the player and a second selection effect executed based on the movement of the player.
The corresponding effect execution means
When the item corresponding to the second effect different from the first effect is selected in the state where the first effect is executed , the second effect is executed.
In a state where the first effect is running, it performs the if the item corresponding is selected again the first effect, takes over the state of the first effect being executed,
Music can be played as the plurality of types of effects,
When the item selected in the first selection effect is changed, the music to be played is changed according to the change of the selected item.
Even if the item selected in the second selection effect is changed, the music to be played is not changed.
A game machine characterized by that. A notification effect execution means capable of executing a notification effect for notifying that a specific condition advantageous to the player has been satisfied is provided.
The notification effect execution means can execute the notification effect when the first selection effect is being executed.
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the gaming machine is characterized in that.